109.06 - Seo - Ups, Contol Cubile, Controller, Technical Leaflets

COMMENTS :
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
REV
11/10/2010
ETABLI
ESTABLISHED
VERIFIE
CHECKED
Approved
APPROUVE
APPROVED
DATE
Approved as noted
Date : ..
MODIFICATIONS
Returned for correction
STAT
For information
Signature : .
LAHMEYER INTERNATIONAL
GOVERNMENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF THE SUDAN

MINISTRY OF IRRIGATION AND WATER RESOURCES
MEROWE DAM PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION UNIT
MEROWE DAM PROJECT

10 x 140MVA
CONTRACTS 3A, 3B, 3C, 3E
ENGINEER:
CONTRACTOR:
OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM

CONTROLLER CABINET, TECHNICAL LEAFLETS, UPS & UNIT DISPLAY -SEO(92SEOW01DL, 92SEO001AR)
SCALE
1/1
Subcontractor:
Power Environment
Hydro
REV
AHS MRW00SEO.OM.109.06
SH/SH END N of SH
1/
INTERNAL USE
Ce document proprit de ALSTOM ne doit pas tre utilis, copi ou communiqu des tiers sans son autorisation
This document is the exclusive property of ALSTOM and shall not be used copied or communicated to third parties without their prior authorization
AHS-MRW00SEO.OM.109.06
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 1 of 416
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE
CHAPTER
B)
List of Illustrations
C)
Introduction:
C1)
General Description of Equipment
C2)
Brief Description of Equipment Use
C3)
Definitions and Technical Terms Used
C4)
List of items used
10
11
D)
E)
Detailed Description of Equipment

Operating Principles and Characteristics
12
SAFETYSTANDARDS
15
GENERALDESCRIPTION/OPERATION
16
UNPACKING&INSTALLATION
18
CONFIGURATION&STARTUP
21
DISPLAYS&CONTROLS
22
USEOFSIGNALRELAY
26
TECHNICALDATA
27
TROUBLESHOOTING
28
CONTROLCUBICLEEQUIPMENTDRAWINGSANITARYWASTEWATERTREATMENTSYS.
29
ELECTRICALDIAGRAMSANITARYWASTEWATERTREATMENTSYS.
39
TECHNICALLEAFLETS
65
CIRCUITBREAKERS
66
CONTROL&SIGNALLINGUNITS
88
POWERDISTRIBUTION
138
CURRENTTRANSFORMER
140
MOTORSTARTERS
153
CONTACTORCONTROLUNITS
169
BEACONS
176
RELAYS
183
MISCELLANEOUSCOMPONENTS
194
UNINTERRUPTABLEPOWERSUPPLY(UPS)
F)
G)
Operating Instructions
Testing and Adjustment
UNITDISPLAYOPERATOR'SMANUALMEGALISXBTR410
209
UNITDISPLAYUSERMANUAL
216
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
208
page: 2 of 416
PAGE
CHAPTER
H)
407
Maintenance Instructions:
H1)
Preventive Maintenance
408
H2)
Repair and Adjustment
409
MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS:UPSSYSTEM
410
H3)
Spare Parts Lists
412
H4)
H5)
Special Tools Lists

List of Suppliers
414
415
416
J)
As Built Drawings
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 3 of 416
B) LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
SITE TEST REPORTS
SEO DOMESTIC SEWAGE SANITARY

WASTEWATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 4 of 416
C) INTRODUCTION
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 5 of 416
C1) BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT

CONTROLLER CABINET ,
UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY,
DISPLAY UNIT
LIST OF MAIN EQUIPMENT:
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
MODEL
SUPPLIER
92SEOW01DL
UINTERREUPTED POWER SUPPLY

(UPS)
ENT-TW15
(800-2000VA)
MANUF:
SOCOMEC
SICON
SUPPLIER: HYTEC
---
UNIT DISPLAY
92SEO001AR
CABINET CONTROLLER
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
XBTR410
---
MANUF:
MAGELIS
(SCHNEIDER)
SUPPLIER: HYTEC
SUPPLIER: HYTEC
page: 6 of 416
C2) DESCRIPTION OF USE OF EQUIPMENT
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 7 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 8 of 416
C3) DEFINITION OF TECHNICAL TERMS

UPS: The main purpose of the UPS is to protect sensitive and critical equipment items from
the electrical disturbances that can compromise operation. Black-outs, brown-outs,
variations of voltage and frequency, lightening, electrostatic discharges and rapid
overvoltages are phenomena found in all office and industrial environments and which cause
hardware damage and data losses.
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 9 of 416
C4) List of Items Used
UNIT SYS. NUM
TYPE
DESIGNATION
SUPP.
ROOM
92
SEO 001
AR
CABINET CONTROLER
AHS
STP
92
SEO 001
DL
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
AHS
STP
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 10 of 416
D) DETAILED DESCRIPTION
&
E) OPERATING PRINCIPLES AND
CHARACTERISTICS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 11 of 416
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWERSUPPLY
UPS - 92SEO001DL
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 12 of 416
5. MISCELLANEOUS
5.1. Uninterruptible power supply 92SEOW01DL
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 180/201 /A
page: 13 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 181/201 /A
page: 14 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 182/201 /A
page: 15 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 183/201 /A
page: 16 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 184/201 /A
page: 17 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 185/201 /A
page: 18 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 186/201 /A
page: 19 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 187/201 /A
page: 20 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 188/201 /A
page: 21 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 189/201 /A
page: 22 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 190/201 /A
page: 23 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 191/201 /A
page: 24 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 192/201 /A
page: 25 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 193/201 /A
page: 26 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 194/201 /A
page: 27 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 195/201 /A
page: 28 of 416
CONTROL CUBICLE EQUIPMENT DRAWING

92SEO00AR
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 29 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 3/11 /A
page: 30 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 4/11 /A
page: 31 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 5/11 /A
page: 32 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 6/11 /A
page: 33 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 7/11 /A
page: 34 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 8/11 /A
page: 35 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 9/11 /A
page: 36 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 10/11 /A
page: 37 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
722-11803.11. 11/11 /A
page: 38 of 416
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 39 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 3/27 /A
page: 40 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 4/27 /A
page: 41 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 5/27 /A
page: 42 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 6/27 /A
page: 43 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 7/27 /A
page: 44 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 8/27 /A
page: 45 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 9/27 /A
page: 46 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 10/27 /A
page: 47 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 11/27 /A
page: 48 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 12/27 /A
page: 49 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 13/27 /A
page: 50 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 14/27 /A
page: 51 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 15/27 /A
page: 52 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 16/27 /A
page: 53 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 17/27 /A
page: 54 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 18/27 /A
page: 55 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 19/27 /A
page: 56 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 20/27 /A
page: 57 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 21/27 /A
page: 58 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 22/27 /A
page: 59 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 23/27 /A
page: 60 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 24/27 /A
page: 61 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 25/27 /A
page: 62 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 26/27 /A
page: 63 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
721-11803.11. 27/27 /A
page: 64 of 416
TECHNICAL LEAFLETS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 65 of 416
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 66 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
24186
miniature circuit breaker Multi 9 - C60N - 1 pole

+ N - 4 A - C curve
Certifications and standards

EN 60898
IEC 60947-2
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
Standards
Compatibility
Comb busbar distribution block compatibility
NO
Earth-leakage protection
Separate block
Product compatibility
C60 accessories
C60 auxiliary
Connections
Connections - terminals
Tunnel type terminals 25 mm rigid

Tunnel type terminals 16 mm flexible
Electrical
[In] rated current
4 A 30 C
[Ue] rated operational voltage
12...440 V AC 50/60 Hz
[Ui] rated insulation voltage
500 V AC 50/60 Hz IEC 60947-2
[Uimp] rated impulse withstand voltage
6 kV IEC 60947-2
Breaking capacity
20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz

10 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
3 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
15 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 60 V DC 1P
6 kA Icn EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
Magnetic tripping limit
5...10 x In
Network frequency
50/60 Hz
Environment
Ambient air temperature for operation
-25...60 C
Ambient air temperature for storage
-40...70 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Relative humidity
95 % 55 C
Tropicalisation
2 IEC 60068-1
RoHS EUR conformity date
0643
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Functional
Contact position indicator
Yes
Control type
Toggle
Limitation class
3 IEC 60947-2
Local signalling
ON/OFF indication
Mon Oct
11 10:03:43 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 67 of 416
Installation
Mounting mode
Fixed
Mounting support
35 mm symmetrical DIN rail
Performance
[Ics] rated service breaking capacity
2,25 kA IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz

6 kA EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
7,5 kA IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
15 kA IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz
Mechanical durability
20000 cycles
Physical characteristics
9 mm pitches
Depth
73 mm
Height
81 mm
Product weight
0,12 kg
Tightening torque
2 N.m upside power circuit

2 N.m downside
Width
36 mm
Poles descriptions
Neutral position
Left
Number of protected poles
Poles description
1P + N
Product identification
Device short name
C60N
Range of product
C60
Usage / Application
Circuit breaker application
Distribution
Curve code
Network type
AC
DC
Suitability for isolation
Yes IEC 60947-2
Trip unit technology
Thermal-magnetic
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 68 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
24187

+ N - 6 A - C curve

EN 60898
IEC 60947-2
Standards
Compatibility
NO
Separate block
C60 accessories
C60 auxiliary
Connections

Electrical
[In] rated current
6 A 30 C
12...440 V AC 50/60 Hz
500 V AC 50/60 Hz IEC 60947-2
6 kV IEC 60947-2
Breaking capacity
20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz

10 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
3 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
15 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 60 V DC 1P
6 kA Icn EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
5...10 x In
Network frequency
50/60 Hz
Environment
-25...60 C
-40...70 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Relative humidity
95 % 55 C
Tropicalisation
2 IEC 60068-1
0643
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Functional
Yes
Control type
Toggle
Limitation class
3 IEC 60947-2
Local signalling
ON/OFF indication
Mon Oct
11 10:09:27 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 69 of 416
Installation
Mounting mode
Fixed
Mounting support
Performance
15 kA IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz

7,5 kA IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
2,25 kA IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
6 kA EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
20000 cycles
9 mm pitches
Depth
73 mm
Height
81 mm
Product weight
0,12 kg
Tightening torque

2 N.m downside
Width
36 mm
Poles descriptions
Neutral position
Left
Poles description
1P + N
Device short name
C60N
Range of product
C60
Usage / Application
Distribution
Curve code
Network type
AC
DC
Yes IEC 60947-2
Thermal-magnetic
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 70 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
24188

+ N - 10 A - C curve

EN 60898
IEC 60947-2
Standards
Compatibility
NO
Separate block
C60 accessories
C60 auxiliary
Connections

Electrical
[In] rated current
10 A 30 C
12...440 V AC 50/60 Hz
500 V AC 50/60 Hz IEC 60947-2
6 kV IEC 60947-2
Breaking capacity
15 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 60 V DC 1P

20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz
6 kA Icn EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
10 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
3 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
5...10 x In
Network frequency
50/60 Hz
Environment
-25...60 C
-40...70 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Relative humidity
95 % 55 C
Tropicalisation
2 IEC 60068-1
0651
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Functional
Yes
Control type
Toggle
Limitation class
3 IEC 60947-2
Local signalling
ON/OFF indication
Mon Oct
11 10:00:25 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 71 of 416
Installation
Mounting mode
Fixed
Mounting support
Performance
15 kA IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz

7,5 kA IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
2,25 kA IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
6 kA EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
20000 cycles
9 mm pitches
Depth
73 mm
Height
81 mm
Product weight
0,12 kg
Tightening torque

2 N.m downside
Width
36 mm
Poles descriptions
Neutral position
Left
Poles description
1P + N
Device short name
C60N
Range of product
C60
Usage / Application
Distribution
Curve code
Network type
AC
DC
Yes IEC 60947-2
Thermal-magnetic
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 72 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
24189


EN 60898
IEC 60947-2
Standards
Compatibility
NO
Separate block
C60 accessories
C60 auxiliary
Connections

Electrical
[In] rated current
16 A 30 C
12...440 V AC 50/60 Hz
500 V AC 50/60 Hz IEC 60947-2
6 kV IEC 60947-2
Breaking capacity
20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz

10 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
3 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
15 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 60 V DC 1P
6 kA Icn EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
5...10 x In
Network frequency
50/60 Hz
Environment
-25...60 C
-40...70 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Relative humidity
95 % 55 C
Tropicalisation
2 IEC 60068-1
0651
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Functional
Yes
Control type
Toggle
Limitation class
3 IEC 60947-2
Local signalling
ON/OFF indication
Mon Oct
11 10:02:23 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 73 of 416
Installation
Mounting mode
Fixed
Mounting support
Performance
7,5 kA IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz

2,25 kA IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
6 kA EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
15 kA IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz
20000 cycles
9 mm pitches
Depth
73 mm
Height
81 mm
Product weight
0,12 kg
Tightening torque

2 N.m downside
Width
36 mm
Poles descriptions
Neutral position
Left
Poles description
1P + N
Device short name
C60N
Range of product
C60
Usage / Application
Distribution
Curve code
Network type
AC
DC
Yes IEC 60947-2
Thermal-magnetic
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 74 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
24193


EN 60898
IEC 60947-2
Standards
Compatibility
NO
Separate block
C60 accessories
C60 auxiliary
Connections

Electrical
[In] rated current
40 A 30 C
12...440 V AC 50/60 Hz
500 V AC 50/60 Hz IEC 60947-2
6 kV IEC 60947-2
Breaking capacity
20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz

10 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
3 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
15 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 60 V DC 1P
6 kA Icn EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
5...10 x In
Network frequency
50/60 Hz
Environment
-25...60 C
-40...70 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Relative humidity
95 % 55 C
Tropicalisation
2 IEC 60068-1
0651
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Functional
Yes
Control type
Toggle
Limitation class
3 IEC 60947-2
Local signalling
ON/OFF indication
Mon Oct
11 10:05:07 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 75 of 416
Installation
Mounting mode
Fixed
Mounting support
Performance
15 kA IEC 60947-2 130 V AC 50/60 Hz

7,5 kA IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
2,25 kA IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
6 kA EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
20000 cycles
9 mm pitches
Depth
73 mm
Height
81 mm
Product weight
0,12 kg
Tightening torque
3,5 N.m upside power circuit

3,5 N.m downside
Width
36 mm
Poles descriptions
Neutral position
Left
Poles description
1P + N
Device short name
C60N
Range of product
C60
Usage / Application
Distribution
Curve code
Network type
AC
DC
Yes IEC 60947-2
Thermal-magnetic
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 76 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
24209
miniature circuit breaker Multi 9 - C60N - 3

poles - 1 A - C curve

EN 60898
IEC 60947-2
Standards
Compatibility
NO
Separate block
C60 accessories
C60 auxiliary
Connections

Electrical
[In] rated current
1 A 30 C
12...440 V AC 50/60 Hz
500 V AC 50/60 Hz IEC 60947-2
6 kV IEC 60947-2
Breaking capacity
6 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 440 V AC 50/60 Hz

6 kA Icn EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 125 V DC 2P
20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
30 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 125 V DC 3P
40 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 250 V DC 4P
10 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
5...10 x In
Network frequency
50/60 Hz
Environment
-25...60 C
-40...70 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Relative humidity
95 % 55 C
Tropicalisation
2 IEC 60068-1
0643
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Mon Oct
11 10:06:32 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 77 of 416
Functional
Yes
Control type
Toggle
Limitation class
3 IEC 60947-2
Local signalling
ON/OFF indication
Installation
Mounting mode
Fixed
Mounting support
Performance
7,5 kA IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz

3,75 kA IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
2,25 kA IEC 60947-2 440 V AC 50/60 Hz
6 kA EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
20000 cycles
9 mm pitches
Depth
73 mm
Height
81 mm
Product weight
0,36 kg
Tightening torque

2 N.m downside
Width
54 mm
Poles descriptions
Poles description
3P
Device short name
C60N
Range of product
C60
Usage / Application
Distribution
Curve code
Network type
AC
DC
Yes IEC 60947-2
Thermal-magnetic
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 78 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
24214
miniature circuit breaker Multi 9 - C60N - 3

poles - 10 A - C curve

EN 60898
IEC 60947-2
Standards
Compatibility
NO
Separate block
C60 accessories
C60 auxiliary
Connections

Electrical
[In] rated current
10 A 30 C
12...440 V AC 50/60 Hz
500 V AC 50/60 Hz IEC 60947-2
6 kV IEC 60947-2
Breaking capacity
10 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz

30 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 125 V DC 3P
20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
40 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 250 V DC 4P
6 kA Icn EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
20 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 125 V DC 2P
6 kA Icu IEC 60947-2 440 V AC 50/60 Hz
5...10 x In
Network frequency
50/60 Hz
Environment
-25...60 C
-40...70 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Relative humidity
95 % 55 C
Tropicalisation
2 IEC 60068-1
0651
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Mon Oct
11 10:08:04 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 79 of 416
Functional
Yes
Control type
Toggle
Limitation class
3 IEC 60947-2
Local signalling
ON/OFF indication
Installation
Mounting mode
Fixed
Mounting support
Performance
7,5 kA IEC 60947-2 230...240 V AC 50/60 Hz

3,75 kA IEC 60947-2 400...415 V AC 50/60 Hz
2,25 kA IEC 60947-2 440 V AC 50/60 Hz
6 kA EN 60898 230/400 V AC 50/60 Hz
20000 cycles
9 mm pitches
Depth
73 mm
Height
81 mm
Product weight
0,36 kg
Tightening torque

2 N.m downside
Width
54 mm
Poles descriptions
Poles description
3P
Device short name
C60N
Range of product
C60
Usage / Application
Distribution
Curve code
Network type
AC
DC
Yes IEC 60947-2
Thermal-magnetic
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 80 of 416
protection
electrical auxiliaries
for C60 and C120 circuit-breakers
tripping
remote indication
Visualisation of tripping by means of the red

indicator on front face.
MX + OF shunt trip
Remote tripping of a circuit-breaker:
c equipped with an OF changeover switch:
- to indicate the circuit-breakers position
- to carry out self-breaking allowing the
control circuit to remain energized.
Undervoltage releases
(MN, MN s )
Controls the tripping of a circuit-breaker
when its supply voltage drops
(threshold between 70 and 35 % of Un)
It allows for manual closing of the
circuit-breaker if its voltage exceeds 85 % of
the rated voltage
delayed MN s release
0.2 second time-delay: prevents tripping due
to brownouts or momentary voltage
decreases.
MNx release for opening pushbutton
Completely unaffected by power supply
circuit cuts, it is recommended for fail-safe
emergency stopping. Replaces the MX
voluntary release equipped with its NO/NC
indicator lights.
MSU overvoltage
MSU voltage threshold release
Specially designed to monitor voltage
between the neutral and phase(s)
conductors, it cuts power supply by opening
the circuit-breaker in event of an overvoltage.
For overvoltages lasting for more than a few
seconds.
technical data
Complance with standard: AS 3947-2
v release consumption
type
voltage
(V AC or DC)
MX+OF 415 V
AC
220...240 V AC
110...130 V AC
DC
48 V
AC
DC
24 V
AC
DC
12 V
AC
DC
MN
220...240 V AC
48 V
AC
DC
MNs
220...240 V AC
MNx
230
AC
400
AC
MSU
230
AC
400
AC
REVISION: A
inrush
inrush
inrush
inrush
inrush
inrush
inrush
inrush
inrush
inrush
holding
holding
holding
holding
inrush
inrush
inrush
inrush
power
(W or VA)
120
50
200
10
22
12
120
120
20
20
4.1
4.3
2.0
4.1
50
120
50
120
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
OF auxiliary switch
v changeover switch that indicates the
open or closed position of the
circuit-breaker.
v test button on the front face that allows for
the indication circuit to be verified without
operating the circuit-breaker
SD fault indicating switch
v changeover switch that indicates the fault
trip position of the circuit-breaker
v visualisation of the fault (SD) by means of
a mechanical indicator on front face.
OF+SD/OF selector switch
v double changeover switch that indicates:
v the open or closed position of the
circuit-breaker (OF)
v the fault trip position of the circuit-breaker
(SD).
v 2 circuits:
- upper: OF
- lower: SD or OF.
v function is selected using rotary selector
switch on the right-hand side
v the selected function is indicated on the
front face
v visualisation of the fault (SD) by means of
a red mechanical indicator on front face.
technical data
Complies with standard: AS 3947-2
v rated current of auxiliary contacts
voltage
(V AC or DC)
415 V
AC
240 V
AC
130 V
DC
48 V
DC
24 V
DC
rated current
(A)
3
6
1
2
6
connection
c using screw clamp terminals for 1 or 2
cables (max. 2.5 mm2)
c visible markers near terminals.
page: 81 of 416 Page 11
AHSMRW00LAA-OM100.159/A
protection
references
type
control voltage
(V AC)
(V DC)
catalogue
number
width
in mod.
of 9 mm
220...415
48...130
24
12
26946
26947
26948
26949
2
2
2
2
220...240
26979
380...415
26980
220...240
48
26960
26961
26962
2
2
2
220...240
26963
220...240
26969
380...415
26971
MX + OF shunt release
U>
14
12
110...130
48
24
12
C2 C1
26946
MSU overvoltage release

1P + N
U >>
3P + N
26979
U >>
L1
L2
L3
MN undervoltage release
instantaneous
48
U<
D1 D2
delayed s
26963
MNx release for opening pushbutton

Ph + N
U<
E1
E2
Ph to Ph
U<
26969
E1
Page 12 AHS-MRW00SEO.OM.109.06
E2
L1
L2
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
Schneider Electric Help Centre: 1300 369 233

page: 82 of 416
protection
type
control voltage
(V AC)
(V DC)
catalogue
number
width
in mod.
of 9 mm
26927
26924
26929
SD fault indicating switch
94
92
91
26927
OF auxiliary contact
14
12
11
26924
OF+SD/OF selector switch

14
24
92
12
22
94
11
21
91
26929
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 83 of 416 Page 13
Presentation, selection
Protection components
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2
for the protection of industrial equipment control
circuits
Presentation
GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers protect and isolate the control circuits of
industrial equipment with contactor coils, transformers.
They protect and isolate single-phase auxiliary circuits such as solenoid valves,
electro-brakes, battery chargers, supplied from the control circuit voltage.
GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB

12 ratings are available, from 0.5 to 20 A, in single-pole (GB2 CB), single-pole +
neutral (GB2 CD) and 2-pole (GB2 DB) versions.
They have a magnetic tripping threshold set at between 12 and 16 In to withstand the
current peaks generated by many industrial components.
GB2 CS
2 ratings are available, 0.5 and 1 A, in single-pole version.
The magnetic tripping threshold is set between 5 and 7 In.
Functions, installation
Clip-on fixing onto all types of 35 mm 5 rails, on 4 rails and on Telequick
mounting plates.
Upstream and downstream marking by means of AB1 clip-in markers.
Clear indication of I and O positions on the operator.
Tamper-proof device which requires no special maintenance (fixed magnetic and
thermal tripping thresholds).
Selection for the protection of circuits supplied by transformers

Single-phase transformers.
Magnetising peak: 20 In.
Operation of magnetic trips: 13 In.
Power
VA
40
Primary (1)
220/240 V 380/415 V
GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05
Secondary
24 V
48 V
GB2 CD07 GB2 CD06
110 V
GB2 CD05
220 V
GB2 CD05
63
GB2 DB05
GB2 DB05
GB2 CD08
GB2 CD07
GB2 CD06
GB2 CD05
100
GB2 DB06
GB2 DB05
GB2 CD10
GB2 CD07
GB2 CD06
GB2 CD05
160
GB2 DB07
GB2 DB06
GB2 CD14
GB2 CD09
GB2 CD07
GB2 CD06
250
GB2 DB07
GB2 DB06
GB2 CD16
GB2 CD12
GB2 CD08
GB2 CD07
400
GB2 DB08
GB2 DB07
GB2 CD22
GB2 CD14
GB2 CD09
GB2 CD07
630
GB2 DB10
GB2 DB08
GB2 CD21
GB2 CD12
GB2 CD08
1000
GB2 DB14
GB2 DB09
GB2 CD16
GB2 CD10
1600
GB2 DB20
GB2 DB14
GB2 CD14
2000
GB2 DB21
GB2 DB14
GB2 CD22
GB2 CD16
2500
GB2 DB22
GB2 DB20
GB2 CD20
3000
GB2 DB22
GB2 DB20
GB2 CD21
4000
GB2 DB21
GB2 CD22
5000
GB2 DB22
(1) If the breaking capacity of the GB2 is insufficient, use a GV2 RT with 2 poles connected in
series, see page 24508/7.
10
Characteristics :
pages 21092/3 to 21092/5
References :
pages 21093/2 and 21093/3
Dimensions :
page 21093/3
REVISION: A
Schemes :
page 21093/3
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 84 of 416
21092-EN_Ver5.0
Characteristics
circuits
Circuit-breaker type
GB2 CB
GB2 CD
GB2 DB
GB2 CS
Environment
Conforming to standards
Product certifications
Protective treatment
Degree of protection
Shock resistance
Vibration resistance
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Flame resistance
Maximum operating altitude
Operating position
Conforming to IEC 60529

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Storage
Operation
IEC 60947-1, 947-2, EN 60947-1, 60947-2

CSA, NEMKO, UL
NEMKO, UL
TC
IP 20
22 gn for 20 ms
5 gn (5110 Hz)
- 40+ 80
- 20+ 60
960
3000
C
C
C
m
In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane
3
GB2 CB,CD, CS
Cabling
Solid cable
Flexible cable with cable end
Tightening torque
GB2 DB
mm2
mm2
N.m
Minimum c.s.a.
1 x 0.75
1 x 0.75
1.2
Maximum c.s.a.
1 x 6 or 2 x 4
1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5
V
V
A
415 (1)
277
A
250
A
415
277
A
415 (1)
Hz
kV
50/60
4
50/60
4
50/60
4
50/60
4
W
C.O.
2
8000
2
8000
2
8000
1.9
8000
- 20
Technical characteristics
Utilisation category
Rated operational voltage
(Ue)
Conforming to IEC 60947-2

Conforming to CSA C22-2 Nr 14
and UL 1077
Rated operational frequency

Rated impulse withstand
voltage (U imp)
Total power dissipated per pole
Mechanical and
C.O.: Closing - Opening
electrical durability
Operational current
According to the permissible
correction coefficient
ambient temperature
(a or c)
Correction coefficient
Tripping threshold
Of the magnetic trips
- 10
1.2
1.15
1216 In
+ 10
1.1
1.05
1216 In
+ 20
1
+ 30
+ 40
+ 50
+ 60
0.95
1216 In
0.90
0.85
57 In
0.80
(1) One GB2 circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
Tripping curves
Seconds
Minutes
120
60
20
10
5
2
1
20
10
5
2
1
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
Milliseconds
Milliseconds
Seconds
Minutes
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow (cold state)

GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB
GB2 CS
1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8
1,5
10
Presentation, selection :
page 21092/2
1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8
1,5
10
100 x In
References :
pages 21093/2 and 21093/3
21092-EN_Ver5.0
120
60
20
10
5
2
1
20
10
5
2
1
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
Dimensions :
page 21093/3
REVISION: A
10
100 x In
Schemes :
page 21093/3
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 85 of 416
Characteristics (continued)
circuits
Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2
a 50/60 Hz
2
Associated fuses, if required
if Isc > breaking capacity Icu
110 V
Icu
Ics % (1)
kA
50
100
50
50
15
50
10
50
6
50
3
75
3
75
3
75
2
75
2
75
2
75
2
75
230/240 V
Icu
Ics % (1)
kA
50
25
50
25
15
25
3
50
3
50
2
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
400/415 V
Icu
Ics % (1)
kA
50
25
50
25
15
25
3
50
3
50
2
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
110 V
aM
gG
A
A
g
g
g
g
20
25
25
32
25
32
40
50
40
50
50
63
50
63
63
80
63
80
63
80
230/240 V
aM
gG
A
A
g
g
g
g
16
25
20
32
20
32
32
40
32
40
40
50
40
50
50
63
50
63
50
63
400/415 V
aM
gG
A
A
g
g
g
g
16
25
20
32
20
32
32
40
32
40
40
50
40
50
50
63
50
63
50
63
GB2
CD05 CD06 CD07 CD08 CD09 CD10 CD12 CD14 CD16 CD20 CD21 CD22
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20
Rating
Breaking capacity
a 50/60 Hz

if lsc > breaking capacity Icu
110 V
Icu
Ics % (1)
kA
50
100
50
50
15
50
10
50
6
50
3
75
3
75
3
75
2
75
2
75
2
75
2
75
230/ 240 V
Icu
Ics % (1)
kA
50
25
50
25
15
25
3
50
3
50
2
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
110 V
aM
gG
A
A
g
g
g
g
20
25
25
32
25
32
40
50
40
50
50
63
50
63
63
80
63
80
63
80
230/240 V
aM
gG
A
A
g
g
g
g
16
25
20
32
20
32
32
40
32
40
40
50
40
50
50
63
50
63
50
63
GB2
DB05 DB06 DB07 DB08 DB09 DB10 DB12 DB14 DB16 DB20 DB21 DB22
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20
Rating
Breaking capacity
a 50/60 Hz

if lsc > breaking capacity Icu
GB2
CB05 CB06 CB07 CB08 CB09 CB10 CB12 CB14 CB16 CB20 CB21 CB22
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20
110 V
lcu
Ics % (1)
kA
50
100
50
50
15
50
10
50
6
50
3
75
3
75
3
75
2
75
2
75
2
75
2
75
230/240 V
lcu
Ics % (1)
kA
50
25
50
25
15
25
3
50
3
50
2
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
400/415 V
lcu
Ics % (1)
kA
50
25
50
25
15
25
3
50
3
50
2
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
75
1.5
1.5
75
75
110 V
aM
gG
A
A
g
g
g
g
20
25
25
32
25
32
40
50
40
50
50
63
50
63
63
80
63
80
63
80
230/240 V
aM
gG
A
A
g
g
g
g
16
25
20
32
20
32
32
40
32
40
40
50
40
50
50
63
50
63
50
63
400/415 V
aM
gG
A
A
g
g
g
g
16
25
20
32
20
32
32
40
32
40
40
50
40
50
50
63
50
63
50
63
(1) As % of Icu.
g Fuse not required. Breaking capacity Icu > lsc.
10
page 21092/2
References :
page 21093/2
Dimensions :
page 21093/3
REVISION: A
Schemes :
page 21093/3
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 86 of 416
21092-EN_Ver5.0
circuits
24 V
48 V
kA
kA
GB2
pp05 pp06 pp07 pp08 pp09 pp10 pp12 pp14 pp16 pp20 pp21 pp22
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC-12
24 V
48 V
A
A
0.5
0.5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
8
10
10
12
12
16
16
20
20
DC-13
24 V
48 V
A
A
0.5
0.5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
8
10
12
16
20
GB2
CS05
0.5
CS06
1
Breaking capacity (lcu)

c
Operational current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
c
Rating
110 V
Breaking capacity
a 50/60 Hz
lcu
lcs % (1)
kA
50
100
50
100
230/240 V lcu
lcs % (1)
kA
50
25
50
25
400/415 V lcu
(2)
lcs % (1)
kA
50
25
50
25
24 V
48 V
kA
kA
1.5
1
1.5
1
DC-12
24 V
48 V
A
A
0.5
0.5
1
1
DC-13
24 V
48 V
A
A
0.5
0.5
1
1
48
110
230
48
110
230
m
m
m
m
m
m
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
31
39
52
78
130
200
365
460
610
910
1520
2400
6
8
10
15
26
41
85
110
145
220
360
580
230
290
380
570
950
1500
48
110
230
48
110
230
m
m
m
m
m
m
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
230
290
390
580
970
1500
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
56
70
95
140
230
375
230
290
380
570
950
1500
48
110
230
48
110
230
m
m
m
m
m
m
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
46
60
80
120
190
310
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
13
17
22
34
56
90
100
130
170
250
420
680
Breaking capacity (lcu)

c
Operational current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
c
Maximum
permissible
line length for
star-delta starting
(length of cable
containing 2 or
more conductors)
With contactors
LCp D09 D18
Operational voltage
C.s.a.
With contactors
LCp D25D32
Operational voltage
C.s.a.
With contactors
LCp D40D80
060 mm2
0.75 mm2
1 mm2
1.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
4 mm2
0.60 mm2
0.75 mm2
1 mm2
1.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
4 mm2
Operational voltage
C.s.a.
0.60 mm2
0.75 mm2
1 mm2
1.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
4 mm2
(1) As % of Icu.
(2) One GB2 CS circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
(3) Use relays.
10
page 21092/2
References :
pages 21093/2 and 21093/3
21092-EN_Ver5.0
Dimensions :
page 21093/3
REVISION: A
Schemes :
page 21093/3
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 87 of 416
CONTROL & SIGNALLING UNITS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 88 of 416
Control and signalling units

The essential guide
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 89 of 416
General
Control and signalling units 22

Harmony style 5
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights, with double
insulated bezel
Description
The 22, style 5 range of control and signalling units comprises:
Sub-assemblies for user assembly

ZB5-A
2
Pushbuttons and switches:
Head and body
sub-assemblies
Pilot lights:
Head and body
sub-assemblies
Component parts and accessories

ZB
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
2/0
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: Schneider
90 of 416Electric
General

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Schematic library
Pushbuttons and Emergency stop pushbuttons
Pushbutton
N/O contact
Pushbutton
N/C contact
Mushroom head,
spring return
Emergency stop latching

mushroom head. Push-pull
N/O contact
N/C contact
2
Emergency stop trigger
action mushroom head
Push-pull
N/O + N/C contact

Key release
N/O + N/C contact

Turn to release - N/C contact Key release - N/C contact

Turn to release
N/O + N/C contact
Double-headed pushbutton
N/O + N/C contact
Selector switches
1
102
102
Selector switch - 2 position, Selector switch - 3 position, Selector switch - 3 position,

stay put
stay put
2 spring return to centre
N/O contact
N/O + N/O contact
N/O + N/O contact
1
Selector switch - 2 position,

stay put, key withdrawal LH
position - N/O contact
Selector switch - 2 position,

spring return from right to left,
key withdrawal LH position
N/O contact
Pilot lights
LED
IN
LED
Pilot light with BA 9s

incandescent bulb
LED pilot light
IN
230 V
6V
Pilot light with integral transformer, 230 V a primary,

6 V secondary. BA 9s incandescent bulb or LED
Illuminated pushbuttons and selector switches

LED
LED
IN
250 V max
13
23
24
14
Illuminated pushbutton
BA 9s incandescent bulb
N/O + N/C contact
with LED
N/O + N/C contact
LED
IN
230 V
6V
LED
Double-headed pushbutton
with integral transformer, with LED pilot light
230 V a 50/60 Hz primary, N/O + N/C contact
6 V secondary.
BA 9s incandescent bulb or LED
N/O + N/C contact
Illuminated selector switch

with LED - 2 position stay put
N/O + N/C contact
4 direction
Joystick controllers
2 direction
A
Without
spring return
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Schneider
Electric
With
spring return
Without
spring return
With spring
return
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 91 of 416
2/1
General (continued)

Harmony style 5
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights, with double insulated bezel
Sub-assemblies, ZB5-A
Non illuminated units

for user assembly
Contact functions
Body
sub-assemblies
Head
sub-assemblies
Screw clamp terminals

ZB5-AZ10p/AZ141
see page 2/10
Flush push
Pushbuttons, spring return,

without marking
Plug-in connector
ZB5-AZ10p4/AZ1414
see page 2/10
Flush push for

insertion of legend
Flush push
ZB5-AA0/AA9
see page 2/11
ZB5-AAp
see page 2/11
ZB5-AAp8
see page 2/11
ZB5-CAp
see page 2/11
Projecting push
ZB5-ALp
see page 2/11
Recessed push
ZB5-AAp4
see page 2/11
Booted ush push

ZB5-APp/APp8
see page 2/11
Projecting push
ZB5-CLp
see page 2/11
Flush push
ZB5-AAp3p/AAp4p
see page 2/12
Projecting push
ZB5-AL
see page 2/12
Flush push
ZB5-CAp3/CAp9
see page 2/12
Pushbuttons, spring return,

with marking
Push-turn pushbuttons
(1) Knob positions
Lockable
ZB5-AFD
see page 2/12
Knurled knob (1)

ZB5-AF
see page 2/12
Double-headed pushbuttons,
spring return
Flush pushes (IP 40/IP 66)

Without/with markings
ZB5-AA81/AA82
ZB5-AA91/AA92
see page 2/13
see page 2/13
Flush push + Projecting push (IP 40/IP 66)

ZB5-AL83/AL84
ZB5-AL93/AL94
see page 2/13
see page 2/13
Flush push
ZB5-AH0/CH0
see page 2/13
Flush push
ZB5-CH0p
see page 2/13
Push-push to release
pushbuttons
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
2/2
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Projecting push
ZB5-AHp
see page 2/13
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: Schneider
92 of 416Electric
General

Harmony style 5
Non illuminated units

for user assembly
Contact functions (continued)
(continued)
Body
sub-assemblies
Head
sub-assemblies
Mushroom head pushbuttons,

spring return
30
40
60
Spring return
ZB5-AC/AR
see page 2/14

ZB5-AZ10p/AZ141
see page 2/10
Mushroom head pushbuttons,
latching
30
40
60
Push-pull
ZB5-AT84/ATp/AXp
see page 2/15
Plug-in connector
ZB5-AZ10p4/AZ1414
see page 2/10
30
40
60
Turn to release
ZB5-AS8p4/AS4p/AS5p/AS6p
see page 2/15
30
40
60
Key release
ZB5-AS9p4/AS7p/AS1p/AS2p
see page 2/15
(1) Switch handle
and knob
Selector switches
and key switches
Standard handle (1)

ZB5-ADp
see page 2/16
Long blk.handle (1)

ZB5-AJp
see page 2/17
Knurled blk. knob (1)

ZB5-ADp9
see page 2/18
Key switches (2)

ZB5-AGp/AG0p
see page 2/19
(2) Key withdrawal

positions for key
switches
Key withdrawal
positions
Toggle switches
2 positions
ZB5-ADp8
see page 2/19
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 93 of 416
2/3
General (continued)

Harmony style 5
Pilot lights
for user assembly
Signalling functions
Body sub-assemblies
Integral LED
Head sub-assemblies
With lens mounted

ZB5-AV0p3
see page 2/21
ZB5-CV0p3
see page 2/21
With 5 separate lenses

ZB5-AV003
see page 2/21
ZB5-CV003
see page 2/21

ZB5-AVB/AVG/AVM
see page 2/20
Plug-in connector
ZB5-AVBp4/AVGp4/AVMp4
see page 2/20
Body sub-assemblies
for BA 9s bulb
Head sub-assemblies
With lens mounted

ZB5-AV0p
see page 2/21
Direct supply
ZB5-AV6
see page 2/21
Via integral transformer

ZB5-AVp/AV3Dp(1)/AV5Dp(1)
see page 2/21
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
2/4
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: Schneider
94 of 416Electric
General

Harmony style 5
Illuminatedpushbuttons
and selector switches
for user assembly
Combined contact and signalling functions

Body sub-assemblies
Integral LED
Head sub-assemblies
Illuminated pushbuttons,
spring return
Flush push with cap
mounted or not
Flush push for

insertion of legend
Booted Flush push
ZB5-AW3p3/AW9p3
see page 2/29
ZB5-AAp8
see page 2/29
ZB5-AW5p3
see page 2/29
Projecting push
Flush or projecting push
ZB5-AW1p3/ALp8
see page 2/29
ZB5-CW3p3/CW1p3
see page 2/29

ZB5-AW0B/AW0G/
AW0M
see page 2/24
Double headed pushbuttons,

spring return, with pilot light
Plug-in connector
ZB5-AW0Bpp4/
AW0Gpp4/AW0Mpp4
see page 2/26
Flush pushes
ZB5-AW81ppp3,
ZB5-AW82ppp3
see page 2/30
see page 2/30
Flush push + projecting push

ZB5-AW83ppp3,
ZB5-AW84ppp3
see page 2/30
see page 2/30
Illuminated push-push to
release pushbuttons and
illuminated selector switches
with standard handle
Flush or projecting
push-push to release
ZB5-AH0i3/AHp3
see page 2/30
Body sub-assemblies
For BA 9s bulb
Selector switches with

standard handle
ZB5-AK1pi3
see page 2/31
Head sub-assemblies
Illuminated pushbuttons,
spring return
Flush push
ZB5-AW3p
see page 2/29
Direct supply
ZB5-AW06p
see page 2/28
Projecting push
ZB5-AW1p
see page 2/29

ZB5-AW03/4/5/3D/5D
see page 2/28
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 95 of 416
2/5
Characteristics

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Environment
standard version
TH
Ambient air temperature

around the device
Storage
- 40+ 70
Operation
- 25+ 70 unless otherwise stated
Electric shock protection
Class II
Degree of protection
IP 65, unless otherwise stated

IP 66, for booted pushbutton heads
Conforming to NEMA
NEMA type 4X and 13, unless otherwise stated
High pressure cleaning resistance

Mechanical shock protection
Pa
Conforming to EN 50102
70 x 105 (70 bar); distance: 0.1 m

Temperature: 55C
Non illuminated heads: IK 03
Illuminated heads: IK 05
Conforming to standards
Product certications
Terminal identication
IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-4,

JIS C 4520,
UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14
UL Listed, CSA
Standard single contacts with screw clamp terminals: A600; Q600

Double contacts with screw clamp terminals: A600; Q600
Light blocks with screw clamp terminals
Joystick controllers XD5-PA/ZD5-PA: A600; R300
UL Recognized, CSA
Standard single contacts for plug-in connector: A300; R300

Standard single contacts for printed circuit board: B300; R300
BV, RINA, LROS, DNV, GL (pending)
Standard single contacts and double contacts with screw clamp

terminals
Conforming to EN 50005 & EN 50013
Characteristics of contact blocks

Mechanical characteristics
Contact operation
N/C or N/O
Slow break
Positive operation
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1

Appendix K
All functions incorporating a N/C contact are positive opening

operation
Operating travel
(to change electrical state)
Pushbutton
mm
mm
mm
Changing N/C state: 1.5

Changing N/O state: 2.6
Total travel: 4.3
Operating force
Pushbutton
N
N
Changing N/C state: 3.5

Changing N/O state: 3.8
Additional contact
(extra to change state)
N
N
Single N/C contact: 2

Single N/O contact: 2.3
N
N
N
Double contact N/C: 3.4

Double contact N/O: 5
Double contact N/C + N/O: 4.6
N
N
Standard push-pull: 45
Trigger action push-pull: 50
N
N
Standard turn to release and key release: 40

Trigger action turn to release and key release: 44
Emergency stop with N/C + N/O
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/6
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: Schneider
96 of 416Electric
Characteristics

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Characteristics of contact blocks (continued)

Mechanical characteristics (continued)
Operating torque
(to change electrical state)
(in millions of operating cycles)
Selector switches
N.m
N/O contact: 0.14
Additional contact (extra)
N.m
N/O contact: 0.05
Pushbuttons
Spring return
Double-headed
5
1
0.5
Selector
switches
Non illuminated
Illuminated
3
1
Toggle switches
0.5
Emergency stop pushbuttons
0.3
Standard contact blocks
Low power switching contact blocks
0.5
Shock resistance
gn
Frequency: 2 to 500 Hz: 5
gn
gn
All functions except mushroom head pushbuttons

half sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 50
half sine wave acceleration 18 ms: 30
gn
Mushroom head pushbuttons (half sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 10
Electrical characteristics
Cabling capacity
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1

mm2
mm2
Contact material
Short-circuit protection
Silver alloy
(Ag / Ni)
Standard single and double blocks with screw clamp terminals

Blocks for plug-in connector
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection
Gold ashed
(Ag / Ni / Au)
Low power switching contact blocks with screw clamp terminals

Low power switching contact blocks for printed circuit board connection
A
A
A
Nominal thermal current
Rated insulation voltage
A
A
A
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Schneider
Electric
Standard single and double blocks with screw clamp terminals: 10

Blocks for plug-in connector: 10
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection: 6
kV
kV
kV
Standard single and double blocks with screw clamp terminals:

Uimp = 6
Blocks for plug-in connector: Uimp = 4
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection: Uimp = 4
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Standard single and double blocks with screw clamp terminals: 10

(gG cartridge fuse conforming to IEC 269-1)
Blocks for plug-in connector: 4
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection: 4

Ui = 600 degree of pollution 3
Blocks for plug-in connector or Faston connectors: Ui = 250 degree
of pollution 3
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection:
Ui = 250 degree of pollution 3
V
V

voltage

Min.: 1 x 0.22 without cable end
Max.: 2 x 1.5 with cable end
Cross headed screw (Pozidrive or Philips type 1), slotted for at
4 and 5.5 mm screwdriver.
Tightening torque: 0.8 N.m (max. 1.2 N.m)
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 97 of 416
2/7

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Characteristics of contact blocks (continued)

Electrical characteristics (continued)
Rated operational characteristics
a.c. supply:
utilisation category AC-15

A600: Ue = 600 V and le = 1.2 A or Ue = 240 V and le = 3 A
or Ue = 120 V and le = 6 A
Blocks for plug-in connector:
A300: Ue = 120 V and le = 6 A or Ue = 240 V and le = 3 A

B300: Ue = 120 V and le = 3 A or Ue = 240 V and le = 1.5 A
d.c. supply:
utilisation category DC-13

Q600: Ue = 600 V and le = 0.1 A or Ue = 250 V et le = 0.27 A
or Ue = 125 V and le = 0.55 A
Joystick controllers XD5-PA/ZD5-PA:
R300: Ue = 125 V and le = 0.22 A or Ue = 250 V and le = 0.1 A
Blocks for plug-in connector:
Characteristics of special
contact blocks for low power
switching
Electrical durability
Appendix C
Operating rate 3600 operating cycles/
hour. Load factor: 0.5
VA
A
V
a.c. supply for 1 million operating

cycles, utilisation category AC-15
P max.: 12
I max.: 0.1
U max.: 24
Standard single blocks with screw clamp terminals:

V
A
24
4
120
3
230
2
Standard double blocks with screw clamp terminals and blocks for
plug-in connector:
V
A
d.c. supply for 1 million operating
cycles, utilisation category DC-13
24
3
120
1.5
230
1
Standard single blocks with screw clamp terminals:

V
A
24
0.5
110
0.2
Standard double blocks with screw clamp terminals and blocks for
plug-in connector:
V
A
Electrical reliability
24
0.4
110
0.15
Failure rate
According to IEC/EN 60947-5-4
- In clean environment
Standard blocks:
- at 17 V and 5 mA, < 10-8
- at 5 V and 1 mA, < 10-6
Special blocks with gold ashed contacts, for low power switching:
- at 5 V and 1 mA, < 10-8
- In dusty environment
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/8
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Special blocks with gold ashed contacts and dust protection, for
low power switching:
- at 5 V and 1 mA, < 10-8
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: Schneider
98 of 416Electric
Characteristics

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Characteristics of illuminated units (pilot lights, illuminated pushbuttons and illuminated switches)
gn
Frequency: 12 to 500 Hz: 5
Shock resistance
gn
gn
Half sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 50

Half sine wave acceleration 18 ms: 30
mm2
mm2

Min.: 1 x 0.22 without cable end (1 x 0.34 for linking)
Max.: 2 x 1.5 with cable end
Cabling capacity
Rated insulation voltage

voltage
V
V
V
Direct supply pilot light blocks (BA 9s bulb): Ui = 250

degree of pollution 3
Pilot light blocks with integral LED: Ui = 250 degree of pollution 3
Pilot light blocks with transformer: Ui = 600 degree of pollution 3
kV
kV
kV
Direct supply pilot light blocks (BA 9s bulb): Uimp = 4

Pilot light blocks with integral LED: Uimp = 4
Pilot light blocks with transformer: Uimp = 6
Specific characteristics of light modules only, with integral LED

12 V: 10 to 15 c; 10.2 to 13.8 a
24 V: 19.2 to 30 c; 21.6 to 26.4 a
24 to 120 V: 20 to 132 z
48 to 120 V: 40 to 132 a
240 V: 195 to 264 a
Voltage limits
Nominal voltage
Current consumption
Applicable to all colours
mA
mA
mA
mA
z 12 V supply blocks: 18
z 24 V supply blocks: 18
a 120 V supply blocks: 14
a 240 V supply blocks: 14
Service life
At nominal voltage and at an

ambient temperature of 25 C
100,000
Surge withstand
kV
Resistance to fast transients
kV
Resistance to electromagnetic
elds
V/m
10
Resistance to electrostatic
discharges
kV
8/6
Direct parallel connection

across inductive load
E.g.: contactor coil or solenoid
Maximum power of load
VA
For applications involving high powers ( 30 VA), a ZBZ-Vp

LED suppressor must be connected across the light block terminals
(see page 2/33)
Electromagnetic emission
Conforming to EN 55011
Class B
Specific characteristics
Body/xing collar
Tightening torque of xing screw
N.m
0.8 (1.2 max.)
Hour counters and annunciators

Voltage limits
Hour counter and annunciator
10% of the nominal voltage
Current consumption
Hour counter
mA
XB5-DSB (z 12 to 24 V): 7 to 15
XB5-DSG (a 120 V): 8
XB5-DSM (a 230 to 240 V): 8
Annunciator
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
mA
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 99 of 416
2/9
References
To combine with heads: see pages 2/11 to 2/17
Harmony style 5
Pushbuttons and switches, with double insulated bezel
Sub-assemblies, ZB5-A: bodies
Complete bodies (xing collar + contact block)

Type of contact
814411
Description
Screw clamp terminal

connections
814409
ZB5-AZ101
Reference
Weight
N/O
N/C
kg
ZB5-AZ101
0.021
ZB5-AZ102
0.021
ZB5-AZ103
0.030
ZB5-AZ104
0.030
ZB5-AZ105
0.030
ZB5-AZ141
0.040
ZB5-AZ1014
0.018
ZB5-AZ1024
0.018
ZB5-AZ1034
0.026
ZB5-AZ1044
0.026
ZB5-AZ1054
0.026
ZB5-AZ1414
0.036
814408
ZB5-AZ102
Plug-in connector (1)
814410
ZB5-AZ1014
ZB5-AZ1024
Contact blocks
Description
Reference
Separate contact blocks
See page 2/32
(1) Connecting cables and connector for plug-in connector contact blocks: see page 2/34.
Other versions
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/10
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Complete bodies with Faston connector terminals (6.35 or 2 x 2.8).

Please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 100
of 416Electric
Schneider
References
To combine with bodies: see page 2/10
Harmony style 5
Sub-assemblies, ZB5-A: heads
Can be used with XAL control station, see page 5/10
Heads for spring return pushbuttons - unmarked

814416
Shape
of head
Type
of push
Colour
of cap
Reference
Weight
kg
Flush, without cap (1)
ZB5-AA0
0.022
Flush, with set

of 6 colour caps
Flush
6 colours (2)
ZB5-AA9
0.027
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Grey
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
ZB5-AA1
ZB5-AA2
ZB5-AA3
ZB5-AA4
ZB5-AA5
ZB5-AA6
ZB5-AA8
ZB5-AA18
ZB5-AA38
ZB5-AA48
ZB5-AA58
ZB5-AA68
ZB5-AL1
ZB5-AL2
ZB5-AL3
ZB5-AL4
ZB5-AL5
ZB5-AL6
ZB5-AP1
ZB5-AP2
ZB5-AP3
ZB5-AP4
ZB5-AP5
ZB5-AP6
ZB5-AP1S
ZB5-AP2S
ZB5-AP3S
ZB5-AP4S
ZB5-AP5S
ZB5-AP6S
ZB5-AP18
ZB5-AP38
ZB5-AP48
ZB5-AP58
ZB5-AP68
ZB5-AA14
ZB5-AA24
ZB5-AA34
ZB5-AA44
ZB5-AA54
ZB5-AA64
ZB5-AA16
ZB5-AA26
ZB5-AA36
ZB5-AA46
ZB5-AA56
ZB5-AA66
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.021
0.021
0.021
0.021
0.021
0.021
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.023
0.023
0.023
0.023
0.023
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
ZB5-CA0
0.022
ZB5-CA1
White
Black
ZB5-CA2
Green
ZB5-CA3
Red
ZB5-CA4
Yellow
ZB5-CA5
Blue
ZB5-CA6
Projecting
White
ZB5-CL1
Black
ZB5-CL2
Green
ZB5-CL3
Red
ZB5-CL4
Yellow
ZB5-CL5
Blue
ZB5-CL6
(1) Colour cap to be ordered separately, see page 2/36.
(2) 6 different colour caps included with head (white, black, green, red, yellow, blue).
(3) For legend ordering information see page 2/42.
(4) Cap to be ordered separately: see page 2/36.
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.021
0.021
0.021
0.021
0.021
0.021
814417
ZB5-AA0
ZB5-AA5
814418
Flush with
transparent cap,
for insertion of
legend (3)
Projecting
ZB5-AL3
814419
Booted
(clear silicone)
Colour of push
unobscured
Booted
(coloured silicone)
can be replaced without
dismantling the head
compatible with
legend holder
Booted (clear)
for insertion of
legend (3)
Colour of push
unobscured
Flush
(high bezel)
ZB5-AP1
814420
ZB5-AP2S
Recessed
(high guard)
814421
ZB5-CA2
Without cap (4)

Flush
ZB5-CA5
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 101 of 416
2/11
References (continued)
Harmony style 5
Spring return heads can be used with XAL control station, see page 5/11
Heads for spring return pushbuttons - marked

814428
Shape
of head
Type
of push
Marking
Text
Flush
(1)
ZB5-AA331
814429
ZB5-AA432
White
Black
II
White
Black
START
White
Black
ON
White
Black
MARCHE White
Black
White
Black
O
White
ARRET
White
STOP
White
OFF
White
UP
DOWN
Black
White
White
Black
White
ARRET
White
STOP
White
OFF
White
I
O
+
White
White
White
White
White
814430
Projecting
(1)
ZB5-AL232
Flush
(1)
Colour
Colour
of cap
Reference
Weight
kg
Green
White
Green
White
Green
White
Green
White
Green
White
Black
White
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
White
Black
Black
White
ZB5-AA331
ZB5-AA131
ZB5-AA336
ZB5-AA136
ZB5-AA333
ZB5-AA133
ZB5-AA341
ZB5-AA141
ZB5-AA342
ZB5-AA142
ZB5-AA245
ZB5-AA145
ZB5-AA432
ZB5-AA232
ZB5-AA433
ZB5-AA233
ZB5-AA434
ZB5-AA234
ZB5-AA435
ZB5-AA235
ZB5-AA343
ZB5-AA344
ZB5-AA335
ZB5-AA334
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
ZB5-AL432
ZB5-AL232
ZB5-AL433
ZB5-AL233
ZB5-AL434
ZB5-AL234
ZB5-AL435
ZB5-AL235
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
Green
Red
Black
Black
Blue
ZB5-CA331
ZB5-CA432
ZB5-CA2934
ZB5-CA2912
ZB5-CA6939
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
0.019
Heads for lockable push-turn pushbuttons

Shape
of head
Key type
Locking
Key withdrawal
Reference
Key
n 4A185
Both positions
Actuated position
Rest position
Actuated position
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Actuated position
Rest position
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
Both positions
ZB5-AFDA
ZB5-AFDB
ZB5-AFDC
ZB5-AFDD
ZB5-AFDE01
ZB5-AFDE02
ZB5-AFDE03
ZB5-AFDE04
ZB5-AFDE05
ZB5-AFDE06
ZB5-AFDE07
ZB5-AFDE08
ZB5-AFDE09
ZB5-AFDE010
ZB5-AFDE011
ZB5-AFDE012
ZB5-AFDE013
ZB5-AFDE014
LU1
LU2
LU3
LU4
LU5
LU6
LU7
LU8
LU9
LU10
LU11
LU12
LU13
LU14
Weight
kg
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
Heads for knurled operator push-turn pushbuttons

Shape
of head
Description
Marking
Reference
Weight
kg
ZB5-AF
Knurled operator without cap
Knurled operator with marked cap A (white on black b/g) ZB5-AF351

(1) Head supplied with cap not clipped-in, allowing orientation throughout 360 in 90 steps.
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/12
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
0.027
0.030
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 102
of 416Electric
Schneider
References
Harmony style 5
Heads for double-headed, spring return, pushbuttons
814440
Shape
of head
Description
Colour of
pushes
Degree of
protection
Reference
Green
Red
IP 40 (1)
ZB5-AA8134
0.022
IP 66
ZB5-AA9134
0.027
IP 40 (1)
ZB5-AA8112
0.022
IP 66
ZB5-AA9112
0.027
IP 40 (1)
ZB5-AL8334
0.021
IP 66
ZB5-AL9334
0.026
IP 40 (1)
ZB5-AL8312
0.021
IP 66
ZB5-AL9312
0.026
IP 40 (1)
ZB5-AA8234
0.022
IP 66
ZB5-AA9234
0.027
IP 40 (1)
ZB5-AA8212
0.022
IP 66
ZB5-AA9212
0.027
IP 40 (1)
ZB5-AL8434
0.021
IP 66
ZB5-AL9434
0.026
IP 40 (1)
ZB5-AL8412
0.021
IP 66
ZB5-AL9412
0.026
Weight
kg
Without function marking on pushes

2 ush
pushes
White
Black
ZB5-AL8334
814442
1 ush
push
1 projecting
push
Green
Red
White
Black
With function marking on pushes

2 ush
pushes
(marked I)
(marked O)
ZB5-AL9334
Green
Red
814441
White
Black
1 ush
push
1 projecting
push
(marked I)
(marked O)
Green
Red
White
Black
ZB5-AL8434
Heads for push-push to release pushbuttons (2)
814439
Shape
of head
Type
of push
Colour
of push
Reference
Weight
kg
Without cap (3)
ZB5-AH0
0.018
Flush
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
ZB5-AH01
ZB5-AH02
ZB5-AH03
ZB5-AH04
ZB5-AH05
ZB5-AH06
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
Projecting
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
ZB5-AH1
ZB5-AH2
ZB5-AH3
ZB5-AH4
ZB5-AH5
ZB5-AH6
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
Flush
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
ZB5-CH01
ZB5-CH02
ZB5-CH03
ZB5-CH04
ZB5-CH05
ZB5-CH06
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
ZB5-AH04
(1) NEMA type 1.

(2) Maximum of 1 row of 3 contact blocks on associated body/xing collar sub-assembly.
(3) Cap to be ordered separately: see page 2/36.
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 103 of 416
2/13
Harmony style 5
Mushroom heads 30 and 40 mm can be used with XAL control station,
see page 5/11
Mushroom heads for spring return pushbuttons

814444
Shape
of head
Diameter
of push
mm
Colour
of push
30
Black
ZB5-AC24
0.027
Green
ZB5-AC34
0.027
Red
ZB5-AC44
0.027
Yellow
ZB5-AC54
0.027
Blue
ZB5-AC64
0.027
Black
ZB5-AC2
0.046
Green
ZB5-AC3
0.046
Red
ZB5-AC4
0.046
Yellow
ZB5-AC5
0.046
Blue
ZB5-AC6
0.046
Black
ZB5-AR2
0.065
Green
ZB5-AR3
0.065
Red
ZB5-AR4
0.065
Yellow
ZB5-AR5
0.065
Blue
ZB5-AR6
0.065
Black
ZB5-AR216
0.048
Green
ZB5-AR316
0.048
Red
ZB5-AR416
0.048
Yellow
ZB5-AR516
0.048
Blue
ZB5-AR616
0.048
Weight
kg
ZB5-AC24
814445
Reference
40
814446
ZB5-AC2
60
103543
ZB5-AR4
60
Hemispherical
ZB5-AR216
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/14
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 104
of 416Electric
Schneider
References
Harmony style 5
Mushroom heads 30 and 40 mm can be used with XAL control station,
see page 5/12
Mushroom heads for latching pushbuttons

814451
Shape
of head
ZB5-AS844
Type
of push
(Emergency stop: trigger action, colour red)
Diameter
of push
mm
Colour
of push
Reference
Trigger action
Push-pull
(1)
40
Red
ZB5-AT84
0.050
Trigger action
Turn to release
(1)
30
Red
ZB5-AS834
0.042
40
Red
ZB5-AS844
0.046
30
Red
ZB5-AS934
0.068
40
Red
ZB5-AS944 (2)
0.071
60
Red
ZB5-AS964
0.092
Trigger action
Key release
(n 4A185)
(1)
40
Red
ZB5-AS944D
0.071
Push-pull
30
Black
ZB5-AT24
0.044
Red
ZB5-AT44
0.044
Black
ZB5-AT2
0.049
Red
ZB5-AT4
0.049
Black
ZB5-AX2
0.067
Red
ZB5-AX4
0.067
Black
ZB5-AS42
0.040
Red
ZB5-AS44
0.040
Black
ZB5-AS52
0.044
Red
ZB5-AS54
0.044
Yellow
ZB5-AS55
0.044
Black
ZB5-AS62
0.064
Red
ZB5-AS64
0.064
Black
ZB5-AS72
0.040
Red
ZB5-AS74
0.040
Black
ZB5-AS12
0.044
Red
ZB5-AS14 (2)
0.044
Black
ZB5-AS22
0.064
Red
ZB5-AS24
0.064
Red
ZB5-AS14D
0.044
Weight
kg
814452
S
Trigger action
Key release
(n 455)
(1) (3)
814453
ZB5-AS934
40
ZB5-AT44
814454
60
Turn to release
30
40
814455
ZB5-AS54
60
Key release
(n 455) (3)
(2 keys included
with head)
ZB5-AS64
30
40
60
Key release
(n 4A185)
40
(1) Maximum number of contact blocks tted to associated body: 4.

Example: 4 single contact blocks, 2 double contact blocks, or 2 single contact blocks + 1 double contact block. See page
2/32.
(2) Other key numbers:
- key n 421E: add the sufx 12 to the reference.
- key n 458A: add the sufx 10 to the reference.
Example: The reference for a 40 mm red mushroom head for a trigger action, latching pushbutton, with release by key
n 421E becomes: ZB5-AS94412.
(3) For specic keys with other numbers, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 105 of 416
2/15
Harmony style 5
Heads for selector switches (1)

814463
Shape
of head
Type of
operator
Number and type

of positions
Reference
Weight
kg
Standard
handle,
black
2 - stay put
ZB5-AD2
0.024
2 - stay put with

actuation
of centre contact
ZB5-AD2M
0.024
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AD4
0.024
2 - spring return
from right to left
with actuation
of centre contact
ZB5-AD4M
0.024
3 - stay put
ZB5-AD3
0.024
3 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AD5
0.024
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AD7
0.024
3 - spring return
from right to centre
ZB5-AD8
0.024
2 - stay put
ZB5-AD201
0.024
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AD401
0.024
3 - stay put
ZB5-AD301
0.024
3 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AD501
0.024
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AD701
0.024
3 - spring return
ZB5-AD801
0.024
2 - stay put
ZB5-AD203
0.024
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AD403
0.024
3 - stay put
ZB5-AD303
0.024
3 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AD503
0.024
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AD703
0.024
ZB5-AD803
3 - spring return
(1) Can only be used for actuation of end of row (side) mounted contact blocks.
0.024
ZB5-ADp
Standard
handle,
white
Standard
handle,
green
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/16
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 106
of 416Electric
Schneider
References
Harmony style 5
Heads for selector switches (1) (continued)

814463
Shape
of head
Type of
operator
Number and type

of positions
Reference
Weight
kg
Standard
handle,
red
2 - stay put
ZB5-AD204
0.024
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AD404
0.024
3 - stay put
ZB5-AD304
0.024
3 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AD504
0.024
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AD704
0.024
3 - spring return
ZB5-AD804
0.024
2 - stay put
ZB5-AD205
0.024
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AD405
0.024
3 - stay put
ZB5-AD305
0.024
3 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AD505
0.024
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AD705
0.024
3 - spring return
ZB5-AD805
0.024
2 - stay put
ZB5-AD206
0.024
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AD406
0.024
3 - stay put
ZB5-AD306
0.024
3 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AD506
0.024
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AD706
0.024
3 - spring return
ZB5-AD806
0.024
2 - stay put
ZB5-AJ2
0.025
2 - stay put with

actuation
of centre contact
ZB5-AJ2M
0.025
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AJ4
0.025
2 - spring return
from right to left
with actuation
of centre contact
ZB5-AJ4M
0.025
3 - stay put
ZB5-AJ3
0.025
3 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AJ5
0.025
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AJ7
0.025
ZB5-AJ8
3 - spring return
0.025
ZB5-ADpp
Standard
handle,
yellow
Standard
handle,
blue
814472
Long
handle,
black
ZB5-AJ3
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 107 of 416
2/17
Harmony style 5
Heads for knurled knob switches and key switches

814495
Shape
of head
ZB5-ADpp
Type of
operator
Number and type

of positions (2)
Reference
Weight
kg
Knurled
knob,
black
2 - stay put
ZB5-AD29
0.027
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AD49
0.027
3 - stay put
ZB5-AD39
0.027
3 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AD59
0.027
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AD79
0.027
3 - spring return
ZB5-AD89
0.027
2 - stay put
ZB5-AG2 (3)
0.050
ZB5-AG4 (3)
0.050
2 - stay put with

actuation
of centre contact
ZB5-AG2M
0.050
ZB5-AG4M
0.050
2 - spring return
from right to left
ZB5-AG6 (3)
0.050
2 - spring return
from right to left
with actuation
of centre contact
ZB5-AG6M
0.050
3 - stay put
ZB5-AG0 (3)
0.050
ZB5-AG3 (3)
0.050
ZB5-AG5 (3)
0.050
ZB5-AG9 (3)
0.050
ZB5-AG09 (3)
0.050
3 - spring return
from left to centre
ZB5-AG1 (3)
0.050
2 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AG7 (3)
0.050
3 - spring return
from right to
centre
ZB5-AG8 (3)
0.050
814496
Key
(n 455)
(4)
ZB5-AGp
(1)
ZB5-AG08 (3)
0.050
(2) The symbol
indicates key withdrawal position(s).
(3) Other key numbers:
Example: The reference for a head with key n 421E for a 2 position stay put, key switch, with key withdrawal from the
left-hand position, becomes: ZB5-AG212.
(4) For specic keys with other numbers, please call our Customer information centre on 0870 608 8 608.
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/18
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 108
of 416Electric
Schneider
References
Harmony style 5
Heads for key switches (1) (continued)

814517
Shape
of head
Type of
operator
Number and type

of positions (2)
Reference
Weight
kg
Key
(n 8D1)
2 - stay put
ZB5-AG2D
0.050
ZB5-AG02D
0.050
ZB5-AG4D
0.050
2 - spring return
form right to left
ZB5-AG6D
0.050
3 - stay put
ZB5-AG0D
0.050
ZB5-AG3D
0.050
ZB5-AG5D
0.050
ZB5-AG9D
0.050
ZB5-AG09D
0.050
ZB5-AG03D
0.050
ZB5-AG04D
0.050
ZB5-AG06D
0.050
ZB5-AG1D
0.050
ZB5-AG07D
0.050
ZB5-AG8D
0.050
ZB5-AG08D
0.050
ZB5-AG05D
0.050
2 - spring return
to centre
ZB5-AG7D
0.050
ZB5-AGpp
3 - spring return
from left to centre
3 - spring return
Heads for toggle switches

814497
Shape
of head
Description
Lever
colour
Type of
position
Reference
Weight
kg
2 position
Black
Stay put
ZB5-AD28
0.023
Spring return
ZB5-AD48
0.023
White
Stay put
ZB5-AD2801
0.023
Red
Stay put
ZB5-AD2804
0.023
Blue
Stay put
ZB5-AD2806
0.023
ZB5-AD28
(2) The symbol
indicates key withdrawal position(s).
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 109 of 416
2/19
References
To combine with heads for integral LED: see

page 2/23
Harmony style 5
Pilot lights, with double insulated bezel
Complete bodies (fixing collar + light block with integral LED)

Light
source
Supply
voltage
Colour
of light
source
Reference
Reference
Weight
kg
Screw clamp terminal connections

z 12
Integral
LED
2
pp
ZB5-AVp
z 24 (1)
z 24120
a 48...120
a 230240
Steady light
Flashing light
White
ZB5-AVJ1
0.022
Green
ZB5-AVJ3
0.022
Red
ZB5-AVJ4
0.022
Yellow
ZB5-AVJ5
0.022
Blue
ZB5-AVJ6
0.022
White
ZB5-AVB1
ZB5-AV18B1
0.022
Green
ZB5-AVB3
ZB5-AV18B3
0.022
Red
ZB5-AVB4
ZB5-AV18B4
0.022
Yellow
ZB5-AVB5
ZB5-AV18B5
0.022
Blue
ZB5-AVB6
ZB5-AV18B6
0.022
White
ZB5-AVBG1
0.022
Green
ZB5-AVBG3
0.022
Red
ZB5-AVBG4
0.022
Yellow
ZB5-AVBG5
0.022
Blue
ZB5-AVBG6
0.022
White
ZB5-AVG1
ZB5-AV18G1
0.022
Green
ZB5-AVG3
ZB5-AV18G3
0.022
Red
ZB5-AVG4
ZB5-AV18G4
0.022
Yellow
ZB5-AVG5
ZB5-AV18G5
0.022
Blue
ZB5-AVG6
ZB5-AV18G6
0.022
White
ZB5-AVM1
ZB5-AV18M1
0.022
Green
ZB5-AVM3
ZB5-AV18M3
0.022
Red
ZB5-AVM4
ZB5-AV18M4
0.022
Yellow
ZB5-AVM5
ZB5-AV18M5
0.022
Blue
ZB5-AVM6
ZB5-AV18M6
0.022
(1) For 3 terminal test function, add the suffix 156 to the references listed above, example: ZB5-AVB3156, complete
body with integral LED, with test function, colour green.
Other versions
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/20
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9

Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 110
of 416Electric
Schneider
References
To combine with heads for integral LED: see

page 2/23
Harmony style 5
Complete bodies (xing collar + light block with integral LED)

Light
source
Supply
voltage
Colour
of light
source
Weight
Reference
kg
Plug-in connector (1)

Integral
LED
z 24
p p4
ZB5-AVp
a 48...120
a 230240
White
ZB5-AVB14
0.021
Green
ZB5-AVB34
0.021
Red
ZB5-AVB44
0.021
Yellow
ZB5-AVB54
0.021
Blue
ZB5-AVB64
0.021
White
ZB5-AVG14
0.021
Green
ZB5-AVG34
0.021
Red
ZB5-AVG44
0.021
Yellow
ZB5-AVG54
0.021
Blue
ZB5-AVG64
0.021
White
ZB5-AVM14
0.021
Green
ZB5-AVM34
0.021
Red
ZB5-AVM44
0.021
Yellow
ZB5-AVM54
0.021
Blue
ZB5-AVM64
0.021
(1) Connecting cables and connector for plug-in connector light blocks: see page 2/34.
Other versions
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Complete bodies with ashing light block.

Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 111 of 416
2/21
To combine with heads for BA 9s bulb: see

page 2/23
Harmony style 5
Complete bodies (xing collar + light block for BA9s incandescent bulb, neon or LED)
Description
Light
source
Supply
voltage
Colour
of light
source
Reference
Weight
kg
2
ZB5-AV6
Direct
supply
BA 9s bulb
2.4 W max.
Not included (1)
< 250
ZB5-AV6
0.022
Direct
supply
test function
(3 terminals)
BA 9s bulb
2.4 W max.
Not included (1)
< 250
ZB5-AV156
0.022
Via integral
transformer
1.2 VA
6 V secondary
BA 9s
incandescent
bulb included
a 110120
50/60 Hz
ZB5-AV3
0.099
a 230
50 Hz
a 220240
60 Hz
ZB5-AV4
0.099
a 400
50 Hz
ZB5-AV5
0.099
a 440480
60 Hz
ZB5-AV8
0.099
a 550600
60 Hz
ZB5-AV9
0.099
a 110120
50/60 Hz
White
ZB5-AV3D1
0.102
Green
ZB5-AV3D3
0.102
Red
ZB5-AV3D4
0.102
Yellow
ZB5-AV3D5
0.102
Blue
ZB5-AV3D6
0.102
White
ZB5-AV4D1
0.102
Green
ZB5-AV4D3
0.102
Red
ZB5-AV4D4
0.102
Yellow
ZB5-AV4D5
0.102
Blue
ZB5-AV4D6
0.102
White
ZB5-AV5D1
0.102
Green
ZB5-AV5D3
0.102
Red
ZB5-AV5D4
0.102
Yellow
ZB5-AV5D5
0.102
Blue
ZB5-AV5D6
0.102
ZB5-AV3
BA 9s
base tting
LED included
a 230
50 Hz
a 220240
60 Hz
a 400
50/60 Hz
(1) Bulb to be ordered separately: See page 2/44.
Other versions
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/22
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9

Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 112
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
Heads
Shape
of head
For use with body comprising

light source type
Colour
of lens
Reference
Weigh
kg
Integral
LED only
White
ZB5-AV013
0.017
Green
ZB5-AV033
0.017
Red
ZB5-AV043
0.017
Yellow
ZB5-AV053
0.017
Blue
ZB5-AV063
0.017
White
ZB5-AV01
0.018
Green
ZB5-AV03
0.018
Red
ZB5-AV04
0.018
Yellow
ZB5-AV05
0.018
Blue
ZB5-AV06
0.018
Clear
ZB5-AV07
0.018
White
ZB5-CV013
0.020
Green
ZB5-CV033
0.020
Red
ZB5-CV043
0.020
Yellow
ZB5-CV053
0.020
Blue
ZB5-CV063
0.020
5 colours (1) ZB5-CV003
0.028
White
ZB5-AV013E
0.017
Green
ZB5-AV033E
0.017
Red
ZB5-AV043E
0.017
Yellow
ZB5-AV053E
0.017
Blue
ZB5-AV063E
0.017
White
ZB5-AV013S
0.017
Green
ZB5-AV033S
0.017
Red
ZB5-AV043S
0.017
Yellow
ZB5-AV053S
0.017
Blue
ZB5-AV063S
0.017
With plain lens
ZB5-AV053
BA 9s only
(incandescent,
neon or BA 9s
base tting LED)
ZB5-AV01
Integral
LED only
ZB5-CV063
With plain lens, for insertion of legend (2)

Integral
LED only
With grooved lens (3)

Integral
LED only
White
ZB5-AV01S
Green
ZB5-AV03S
Red
ZB5-AV04S
Yellow
ZB5-AV05S
Blue
ZB5-AV06S
Clear
ZB5-AV07S
(1) 5 different colour lenses included with head (White, Green, Red, Yellow, Blue) for insertion of legend.
For legend ordering information, see page 2/42.
(2) For legend ordering information, see page 2/42.
(3) For use in bright ambient light conditions (outdoors in sunlight, for example).
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
For BA 9s bulb
(neon or LED)
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 113 of 416
2/23
References

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Separate components and accessories: electrical blocks
Contact blocks with screw clamp terminal connections (1)

814584
Description
Type of contact
814585
Weight
N/C
ZBE-101
0.011
ZBE-102
0.011
ZBE-203
0.020
ZBE-204
0.020
ZBE-205
0.020
ZBE-1016
0.012
ZBE-1026
0.012
ZBE-1016P
0.012
ZBE-1026P
0.012
For
use with
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Electrical blocks (contact or light)
10
ZB5-AZ009
Standard single
contact blocks
Standard double
contact blocks
814586
ZBE-102
Unit
reference
N/O
ZBE-101
kg
ZBE-203
814587
Special contact blocks

for low power switching
with gold flashed contacts
ZBE-204
814588

with gold flashed contacts
and dust protection (2)
Body/fixing collar
Weight
kg
0.006
ZB5-AZ009
Clip-on legend holders for electrical blocks with screw clamp terminal connections
814582
Identification of a ZB5-A
control or signalling unit
10
ZBZ-001
0.001
10
ZBY-001
0.023
XBY-2U
0.060
Sheet of 50 blank legends

Legend holder ZBZ-001
ZBZ-001
SIS labelling software (for legends ZBY-001)

814590
Sold
in
lots of
Legend design
for English, French, German, Spanish, Italian
(1) The contact blocks enable variable composition of body sub-assemblies and can be stacked to 3 rows, either 3 rows
of 3 single contacts or 1 row of 3 double contacts + 1 row of 3 single contacts (double contact blocks occupy 2 rows).
(2) It is not possible to fit an additional contact block on the back of these contact blocks.
Other versions
Contact blocks with Faston connector terminals (6.35 or 2 x 2.8).

XBY-2U
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/32
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 114
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Light blocks with screw clamp terminal connections

Description
Supply
voltage
V
814592
Integral LED
(to combine with
heads for integral
LED)
z 12
814594
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Unit
reference
Unit
reference
Steady
light
Flashing
light
Super bright
steady light
Weight
kg
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
5
5
5
5
5
ZBV-BJ1
ZBV-BJ3
ZBV-BJ4
ZBV-BJ5
ZBV-BJ6
ZBV-BJ1S
ZBV-BJ3S
ZBV-BJ4S
ZBV-BJ5S
ZBV-BJ6S
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
z 24
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
5
5
5
5
5
ZBV-B1
ZBV-B3
ZBV-B4
ZBV-B5
ZBV-B6
ZBV-18B1
ZBV-18B3
ZBV-18B4
ZBV-18B5
ZBV-18B6
ZBV-B1S
ZBV-B3S
ZBV-B4S
ZBV-B5S
ZBV-B6S
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
z 24120
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
5
5
5
5
5
ZBV-BG1
ZBV-BG3
ZBV-BG4
ZBV-BG5
ZBV-BG6
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
a 48...120
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
5
5
5
5
5
ZBV-G1
ZBV-G3
ZBV-G4
ZBV-G5
ZBV-G6
ZBV-18G1
ZBV-18G3
ZBV-18G4
ZBV-18G5
ZBV-18G6
ZBV-G1S
ZBV-G3S
ZBV-G4S
ZBV-G5S
ZBV-G6S
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
a 230...240
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
5
5
5
5
5
ZBV-M1
ZBV-M3
ZBV-M4
ZBV-M5
ZBV-M6
ZBV-18M1
ZBV-18M3
ZBV-18M4
ZBV-18M5
ZBV-18M6
ZBV-M1S
ZBV-M3S
ZBV-M4S
ZBV-M5S
ZBV-M6S
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
250
ZBV-6
0.016
ZBV-Bp
Direct supply
for BA 9s
2.4 W max. bulb
Not included (1)
Colour of
light source
LED suppressors
For
use with
ZBZ-Vp
Supply
voltage
V
Reference
Weight
kg
Light blocks with a 120

integral LED fitted
with screw clamp
terminal
connections
a 230
ZBZ-VG
0.010
ZBZ-VM
0.010
(1) Bulb to be ordered separately: see page 2/44.
Other versions
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Contact blocks with Faston connector terminals (6.35 or 2 x 2.8).

Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 115 of 416
2/33

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Contact blocks for plug-in connector
814597
Description
Type of contact
Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
N/O
N/C
kg
ZBE-1014
0.009
ZBE-1024
0.009
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
814598
ZBE-1014
Light blocks for plug-in connector

Description
Integral LED
(to combine with
heads for
Integral LED)
Colour of
light source
z 24
White
ZBV-B14
0.016
Green
ZBV-B34
0.016
Red
ZBV-B44
0.016
Yellow
ZBV-B54
0.016
Blue
ZBV-B64
0.016
White
ZBV-G14
0.016
Green
ZBV-G34
0.016
Red
ZBV-G44
0.016
Yellow
ZBV-G54
0.016
Blue
ZBV-G64
0.016
White
ZBV-M14
0.016
Green
ZBV-M34
0.016
Red
ZBV-M44
0.016
Yellow
ZBV-M54
0.016
Blue
ZBV-M64
0.016
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
814599
ZBE-1024
Supply
voltage
V
a 48...120
814602
ZBV-Bp4
a 230240
kg
APE-1C2250
814601
Connecting cables and connector

Description
APE-1PAD21
Number of
connectors
Wire
c.s.a.
mm2
mm
0.75
500
APE-1C2150
0.120
0.75
500
APE-1C2250
0.180
16
APE-1PAD21
0.080
For
use with
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Electrical blocks (contact or light)
10
ZB5-AZ009
Connecting cables 1
with 2-pin connectors 5.08 mm
2
814600
Self-stripping
connector
Length
kg
Body/fixing collar
ZB5-AZ009
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/34
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Weight
kg
0.006
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 116
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Contact blocks for printed circuit board connection

Type of contacts
814605
Description
(1)
Unit
reference
Sold in
lots of
Weight
N/O
N/C
10
ZBE-701
0.002
10
ZBE-702
0.002
10
ZBE-7016
0.003
10
ZBE-7026
0.003
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
814606
ZBE-701
ZBE-702
(with gold ashed contacts
and dust protection)
Light blocks for printed circuit board connection
814607
Description
p7
ZBV-Bp
Integral LED
(to combine with
heads for
Integral LED)
(1)
Supply
voltage
V
Colour
of LED
z 24
White
ZBV-B17
0.004
Green
ZBV-B37
0.004
Red
ZBV-B47
0.004
Yellow
ZBV-B57
0.004
Blue
ZBV-B67
0.004
Sold in
lots of
kg
814608
Adaptor (socket), for printed circuit board connection

For
use with
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Electrical block (contact or light)
10
ZBZ-010
0.008
ZB5-AZ079
814609
Accessories specifically for printed circuit board mounting
(1)
Description
Application
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Fixing collar/pillar
Printed circuit
board support
10
ZB5-AZ079
0.003
Fixing screw for

printed circuit board
Fixing collar/pillar
ZB5-AZ079
10
ZBZ-006
0.011
ZBZ-010
(1) For details of support drilling and printed circuit board: see page 2/55.
Must be used in conjunction with ZBZ-010 adaptor (socket).
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 117 of 416
2/35

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Separate components and accessories: for heads
814611
Pushbutton caps - unmarked
ZBA-p
Type
of push
Colour
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
ZB5-AA0
circular
pushbutton
heads supplied
without cap
Flush
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
6 colours (1)
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
6 colours (1)
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
ZBA-1
ZBA-2
ZBA-3
ZBA-4
ZBA-5
ZBA-6
ZBA-9
ZBL-1
ZBL-2
ZBL-3
ZBL-4
ZBL-5
ZBL-6
ZBL-9
814612
For
use with
Projecting
ZBL-p
Weight
kg
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.006
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.006
814613
Pushbutton caps - marked (3) (Sold in lots of 10)
ZBA-p33
For
use with
Type
of push
Marking
Text
Colour
Colour
of cap
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
ZB5-AA0
circular
pushbutton
heads supplied
without cap
Flush
I (2)
White
Black
Green
White
ZBA-331
ZBA-131
0.001
0.001
II
White
Black
Green
White
ZBA-336
ZBA-136
0.001
0.001
III
White
Black
Green
White
ZBA-337
ZBA-137
0.001
0.001
IV
White
Black
Green
White
ZBA-338
ZBA-138
0.001
0.001
START (2) White

Black
Green
White
ZBA-333
ZBA-133
0.001
0.001
ON
White
Black
Green
White
ZBA-341
ZBA-141
0.001
0.001
MARCHE White
Black
Green
White
ZBA-342
ZBA-142
0.001
0.001
UP (2)
Black
White
ZBA-343
0.001
DOWN (2) White
Black
ZBA-344
0.001
White
Black
Black
White
ZBA-245
ZBA-145
0.001
0.001
White
Black
Black
White
ZBA-335
ZBA-334
0.001
0.001
O (2)
White
Red
Black
ZBA-432
ZBA-232
0.001
0.001
ARRET
White
Red
Black
ZBA-433
ZBA-233
0.001
0.001
STOP (2)
White
Red
Black
ZBA-434
ZBA-234
0.001
0.001
OFF
White
Red
Black
ZBA-435
ZBA-235
0.001
0.001
White
Green
ZBA-346
0.001
R (2)
White
Blue
ZBA-639
0.001
White
Black
ZBA-2934
0.001
ZBA-2935
White
Black
(1) Set of 6 different coloured caps: White, Black, Green, Red, Yellow, Blue.
(2) Double injection moulded marking.
(3) Can be clipped-in at 90 steps through 360.
0.001
(2)
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/36
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 118
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
814614
Standard (30 x 40 mm) legend holders for 8 x 27 mm legends

Description
Legend
Colour
Marking
Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
(1)
Weight
kg
Without
legend
10
ZBZ-32
0.001
With blank
legend
(for engraving)
Black or red
background
10
ZBY-2101
0.002
10
ZBY-4101
0.002
O (black background)
ZBY-2146
0.002
O (red background)
ZBY-2931
0.002
ZBY-2147
0.002
II
ZBY-2148
0.002
O-I
ZBY-2178
0.002
I-II
ZBY-2179
0.002
I-O-II
ZBY-2186
0.002
AUTO
ZBY-2115
0.002
STOP
ZBY-2304
0.002
AUTO-HAND
AUTO-O-HAND
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERGENCY STOP
FAST
FORWARD
HAND
HAND-OFF-AUTO
INCH
LEFT
OFF
OFF-ON
ON
OPEN
POWER ON
RESET (red background)
RESET (black background)
REVERSE
RIGHT
RUN
SLOW
START
STOP-START
UP
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ZBY-2364
ZBY-2385
ZBY-2314
ZBY-2308
ZBY-2330
ZBY-2328
ZBY-2305
ZBY-2316
ZBY-2387
ZBY-2321
ZBY-2310
ZBY-2312
ZBY-2367
ZBY-2311
ZBY-2313
ZBY-2326
ZBY-2323
ZBY-2322
ZBY-2306
ZBY-2309
ZBY-2334
ZBY-2327
ZBY-2303
ZBY-2366
ZBY-2307
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
10
10
ZBY-21010
ZBY-41010
ZBZ-32
814615
White or yellow
background
814300
ZBY-p101
With 8 x 27 mm
international
language
marked
legend
With 8 x 27 mm
English
language
marked legend
Black or red
background
(2)
Black or red
background
(2)
ZBY-2303
Traffolyte legends for engraving

Description
Blank legends
for engraving
Size
Colour
30 x 40 mm
Black/White/Red
White/Black/Yellow
kg
0.002
0.002
10
ZBY-61010
0.002
Black/White/Red
White/Black/Yellow
10
ZBY-61020
0.002
(1) Legends: see pages 2/39 to 2/41.
(2) Start functions: white letters on black background. Stop functions: white letters on red background (unless
otherwise specied above).
30 x 50 mm
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 119 of 416
2/37

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel

814297
Description
814617
ZBY-2107
ZBY-2228
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/38
Legend
Colour
Black or red
background (1)
Marking
With French
ARRET (red background)
language
ARRET (black background)
marked legend
ARRET GENERAL
ARRET REARMEMENT
ARRET D'URGENCE
ARRET-MARCHE
ARRIERE
AUTO CYCLE-CYCLE
AUTO CYCLE-MAIN
AUTO-MAIN
AUTO-O-MAIN
AVANT
AVANT-O-ARRIERE
C-P-C-NORMAL
CYCLE-MAIN
DECLENCHEMENT
DEFAUT (black background)
DEFAUT (red background)
DEPART CYCLE
DESCENTE
DROITE
ENCLENCHEMENT
EN SERVICE
FERMETURE
GAUCHE
HORS SERVICE
HORS-EN
LENT
MAIN
MARCHE
MONTEE
OUVERTURE
PHASE / PHASE
REARMEMENT (red bk.grnd))
REARMEMENT (black bk.grnd)
SOUS TENSION
VITE
With German
Black or red
AB
language
background (1)
AUF
marked legend
AUS
AUS-EIN
AUS-IN BETRIEB
AUS-RUCKSTELLUNG
AUSSCHALTEN
AUTO-HAND
AUTO-O-HAND
AUTOZYKL-HAND
AUTOZYKL- 1 ZYKL
C-P-C-NORMAL
EIN
EINSCHALTEN
HAND
LANGSAM
LINKS
NOT-AUS (red background)
NO-TAUS (yellow background)
NOT-HALT
FFNEN
RECHTS
RUCKSTELLUNG
SCHLIESSEN
SCHNELL
SPANNUNG EIN
STEUERUNG AUS
STEUERUNG EIN
STORUNG (black background)
STORUNG (red background)
VOR
VOR-O-ZURUCK
ZURUCK
ZYKLUS-HAND
ZYKLUSSTART
(1) Start functions: white letters on black background. Stop functions:
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
(continued)
Reference
Weight
kg
ZBY-2104
0.002
ZBY-0104
0.002
ZBY-2129
0.002
ZBY-2133
0.002
ZBY-2130
0.002
ZBY-2166
0.002
ZBY-2106
0.002
ZBY-2198
0.002
ZBY-2199
0.002
ZBY-2164
0.002
ZBY-2185
0.002
ZBY-2105
0.002
ZBY-2184
0.002
ZBY-2165
0.002
ZBY-2197
0.002
ZBY-2132
0.002
ZBY-2134
0.002
ZBY-2135
0.002
ZBY-2195
0.002
ZBY-2108
0.002
ZBY-2109
0.002
ZBY-2131
0.002
ZBY-2111
0.002
ZBY-2114
0.002
ZBY-2110
0.002
ZBY-2112
0.002
ZBY-2167
0.002
ZBY-2127
0.002
ZBY-2116
0.002
ZBY-2103
0.002
ZBY-2107
0.002
ZBY-2113
0.002
ZBY-2196
0.002
ZBY-2123
0.002
ZBY-0123
0.002
ZBY-2126
0.002
ZBY-2128
0.002
ZBY-2208
0.002
ZBY-2207
0.002
ZBY-2204
0.002
ZBY-2266
0.002
ZBY-2267
0.002
ZBY-2233
0.002
ZBY-2232
0.002
ZBY-2364
0.002
ZBY-2385
0.002
ZBY-2299
0.002
ZBY-2298
0.002
ZBY-2265
0.002
ZBY-2203
0.002
ZBY-2231
0.002
ZBY-2316
0.002
ZBY-2227
0.002
ZBY-2210
0.002
ZBY-2230
0.002
ZBY-22420001
0.002
ZBY-2229
0.002
ZBY-2213
0.002
ZBY-2209
0.002
ZBY-2223
0.002
ZBY-2214
0.002
ZBY-2228
0.002
ZBY-2226
0.002
ZBY-2212
0.002
ZBY-2211
0.002
ZBY-2234
0.002
ZBY-2235
0.002
ZBY-2205
0.002
ZBY-2284
0.002
ZBY-2206
0.002
ZBY-2297
0.002
ZBY-2295
0.002
white letters on red background (unless
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 120
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
814621
814620
Flush mounting with bezel legend holders (30 x 40 mm) for 8 x 27 mm legends
ZBY-pH101
814622
814623
ZBZ-34
ZBY-610p
Colour
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Without legend
Circular heads
Square heads
10
10
ZBZ-34
ZBC-Z34
0.003
0.002
With blank
legend
Circular heads
Black or red bk.grnd 10

White or yellow ground 10
ZBY-2H101
ZBY-4H101
0.004
0.004
Square heads

White or yellow bk.grnd 10
ZBC-Y2H101
ZBC-Y4H101
0.002
0.002
Description
For
use with
Colour
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Without legend
Circular and
square heads
10
ZBZ-33
0.001
With blank
legend
Circular and
square heads

ZBY-6101
ZBY-6102
0.002
0.002
Flush mounting with bezel legend holders (30 x 40 mm) for 18 x 27 mm legends
Description
For
use with
Colour
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Without legend
Circular heads
Square heads
10
10
ZBZ-35
ZBC-Z35
0.003
0.002
With blank
legend
Circular heads

ZBY-6H101
ZBY-6H102
0.004
0.004
Square heads

ZBC-Y6H101
ZBC-Y6H102
0.003
0.003
Colour
Unit
reference
ZBY-6H10p
814627
ZBZ-35
For
use with
814625
814624
ZBZ-33
Description
Legends for engraving

Description
For
use with
Sold in
lots of
Weight
mm
8 x 27
18 x 27
kg
30 x 40 mm
legend holders
30 x 50 mm
legend holders
ZBY-0101
0.001
ZBY-0102
0.001
ZBY-5101
0.001
ZBY-5102
0.001
Sheets of peel-off legends (with backing board and protective transparent cover)
814626
ZBY-4100
Description
For
use with
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Sheet of 76
8 x 27 mm
legends
30 x 40 mm legend holders
ZBZ-32 and ZBZ-34
10
ZBY-4100
0.043
Sheet of 40
18 x 27 mm
legends
30 x 50 mm legend holders
ZBZ-33 and ZBZ-35
10
ZBY-5100
0.044
Application
Reference
Weight
kg
Legend design
XBY-2U
SIS labelling software
XBY-2U
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
0.060
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 121 of 416
2/39

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
814628
8 x 27 mm marked legends (for 30 x 40 mm legend holders ZBZ-32 and ZBZ-34)
ZBY-02178
Colour
Marking
Black or red
background
(1)
International
814633
English
ZBY-02303
Reference
Weight
kg
O (black background)
ZBY-02146
0.001
O (red background)
ZBY-02931
0.001
ZBY-02147
0.001
II
ZBY-02148
0.001
O-I
ZBY-02178
0.001
I-II
ZBY-02179
0.001
I-O-II
ZBY-02186
0.001
AUTO
ZBY-02115
0.001
STOP
ZBY-02304
0.001
AUTO-HAND
AUTO-O-HAND
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERGENCY STOP
FAST
FORWARD
HAND
HAND-OFF-AUTO
INCH
LEFT
OFF
OFF-ON
ON
OPEN
POWER ON
RESET (red background)
RESET (black background)
REVERSE
RIGHT
RUN
SLOW
START
STOP-START
UP
ZBY-02364
ZBY-02385
ZBY-02314
ZBY-02308
ZBY-02330
ZBY-02328
ZBY-02305
ZBY-02316
ZBY-02387
ZBY-02321
ZBY-02310
ZBY-02312
ZBY-02367
ZBY-02311
ZBY-02313
ZBY-02326
ZBY-02323
ZBY-02322
ZBY-02306
ZBY-02309
ZBY-02334
ZBY-02327
ZBY-02303
ZBY-02366
ZBY-02307
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/40
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 122
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
8 x 27 mm marked legends (for 30 x 40 mm legend holders ZBZ-32 and ZBZ-34) (continued)

814629
Colour
814633
ZBY-0p104
ZBY-02228
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Weight
kg
Black or red
French
ARRET (red background)
ZBY-02104
0.001
background
ARRET (black background)
ZBY-00104
0.001
(1)
ARRET GENERAL
ZBY-02129
0.001
ARRET REARMEMENT
ZBY-02133
0.001
ARRET D'URGENCE
ZBY-02130
0.001
ARRET-MARCHE
ZBY-02166
0.001
ARRIERE
ZBY-02106
0.001
AUTO CYCLE-CYCLE
ZBY-02198
0.001
AUTO CYCLE-MAIN
ZBY-02199
0.001
AUTO-MAIN
ZBY-02164
0.001
AUTO-O-MAIN
ZBY-02185
0.001
AVANT
ZBY-02105
0.001
AVANT-O-ARRIERE
ZBY-02184
0.001
C-P-C-NORMAL
ZBY-02165
0.001
CYCLE-MAIN
ZBY-02197
0.001
DECLENCHEMENT
ZBY-02132
0.001
DEFAUT (black background)
ZBY-02134
0.001
DEFAUT (red background)
ZBY-02135
0.001
DEPART CYCLE
ZBY-02195
0.001
DESCENTE
ZBY-02108
0.001
DROITE
ZBY-02109
0.001
ENCLENCHEMENT
ZBY-02131
0.001
EN SERVICE
ZBY-02111
0.001
FERMETURE
ZBY-02114
0.001
GAUCHE
ZBY-02110
0.001
HORS SERVICE
ZBY-02112
0.001
HORS-EN
ZBY-02167
0.001
LENT
ZBY-02127
0.001
MAIN
ZBY-02116
0.001
MARCHE
ZBY-02103
0.001
MONTEE
ZBY-02107
0.001
OUVERTURE
ZBY-02113
0.001
PHASE / PHASE
ZBY-02196
0.001
REARMEMENT (red background) ZBY-02123
0.001
REARMEMENT (black backgrnd.) ZBY-00123
0.001
SOUS TENSION
ZBY-02126
0.001
VITE
ZBY-02128
0.001
German
AB
ZBY-02208
0.001
AUF
ZBY-02207
0.001
AUS
ZBY-02204
0.001
AUS-EIN
ZBY-02266
0.001
AUS-IN BETRIEB
ZBY-02267
0.001
AUS-RUCKSTELLUNG
ZBY-02233
0.001
AUSSCHALLEN
ZBY-02232
0.001
AUTO-HAND
ZBY-02364
0.001
AUTO-O-HAND
ZBY-02385
0.001
AUTOZYKL-HAND
ZBY-02299
0.001
AUTOZYKL- 1 ZYKL
ZBY-02298
0.001
C-P-C-NORMAL
ZBY-02265
0.001
EIN
ZBY-02203
0.001
EINSCHALTEN
ZBY-02231
0.001
HAND
ZBY-02316
0.001
LANGSAM
ZBY-02227
0.001
LINKS
ZBY-02210
0.001
NOT-AUS (red background)
ZBY-02230
0.001
NOT-AUS (yellow background)
ZBY-022420001
0.001
NOT-HALT
ZBY-02229
0.001
FFNEN
ZBY-02213
0.001
RECHTS
ZBY-02209
0.001
RUCKSTELLUNG
ZBY-02223
0.001
SCHLIESSEN
ZBY-02214
0.001
SCHNELL
ZBY-02228
0.001
SPANNUNG EIN
ZBY-02226
0.001
STEUERUNG AUS
ZBY-02212
0.001
STEUERUNG EIN
ZBY-02211
0.001
STORUNG (black background) ZBY-02234
0.001
STORUNG (red background)
ZBY-02235
0.001
VOR
ZBY-02205
0.001
VOR-O-ZURUCK
ZBY-02284
0.001
ZURUCK
ZBY-02206
0.001
ZYKLUS-HAND
ZBY-02297
0.001
ZYKLUSSTART
ZBY-02295
0.001
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Marking
Reference
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 123 of 416
2/41

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
814634
Legends for pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights ZB5-A
Description
Marking
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Sheets of 66
circular
peel-off
transparent
self-adhesive
legends
Without
10
ZBY-1101
0.017
Strips of 66
circular
peel-off
transparent
self-adhesive
legends
International
O
I
II
III
STOP
10
10
10
10
10
ZBY-1146
ZBY-1147
ZBY-1148
ZBY-1149
ZBY-1304
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
10
ZBY-1912
0.017
English
HAND
OFF
ON
START
10
10
10
10
ZBY-1316
ZBY-1312
ZBY-1311
ZBY-1303
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
French
ARRET
ARRIERE
AUTO
AVANT
DESCENTE
MAIN
MARCHE
MONTEE
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
ZBY-1104
ZBY-1106
ZBY-1115
ZBY-1105
ZBY-1108
ZBY-1116
ZBY-1103
ZBY-1107
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
German
AB
AUF
AUS
EIN
ZU
10
10
10
10
10
ZBY-1208
ZBY-1207
ZBY-1204
ZBY-1203
ZBY-1214
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
0.017
10
ZBC-Y1101
0.017
XBY-2U
0.060
ZBY-1101
814635
Strip of 66
square
peel-off
transparent
self-adhesive
legends
Without
SIS labelling software

Legend design
Circular legends for Emergency Stop mushroom head pushbuttons (yellow)

XBY-2U
Diameter
mm
Marking, on
yellow background
Reference
Weight
kg
60
Without
EMERGENCY STOP
ARRET D'URGENCE
NOT-AUS
ZBY-9101
ZBY-9330
ZBY-9130
ZBY-9230
0.004
0.004
0.004
0.004
90
Without
EMERGENCY STOP
ARRET D'URGENCE
NOT-AUS
ZBY-8101
ZBY-8330
ZBY-8130
ZBY-8230
0.008
0.008
0.008
0.008
ZBY-9330
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/42
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 124
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Separate components and accessories
814641
Accessories
AF1-XA1
Description
Application
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Cable ducting
support
Fixes beneath head
10
AF1-XA1
0.030
M5 x 10 screw,
with hexagonal
slotted head
For xing cable

ducting
100
AF1-VB510
0.003
Support
Pushbuttons, switches and

pilot lights XB5-A
DX1-AP52
0,160
Metal guards
Padlocking
possible
40 Emergency
Stop and mushroom
head pushbuttons,
either standard or
trigger action
Chromium
plated
ZBZ-1600
0.046
Black
ZBZ-1602
0.046
Red
ZBZ-1604
0.046
Yellow
ZBZ-1605
0.046
Blue
ZBZ-1606
0.046
814638
AF1-VB510
814640
p
ZBZ-160p
103548
814645
ZB5-AZ905
For selector switches Black

with standard handle
or key switches
ZBZ-2102
0.005
Plastic blanking
plug, round,
black (1)
For 22 control and

signalling units with
circular head
10
ZB5-SZ3
0.008
Plastic blanking
plug, square
black (1)
For 22 control and

signalling units with
square head
10
ZB5-SZ5
0.009
Add-on square
trim
Gives a square appearance

to Circular heads ZB5-A
10
ZB5-AZ31
0.002
Nut
Fixing the head
10
ZB5-AZ901
0.002
Bezel tool
Tightening head xing

nut ZB5-AZ901
ZB5-AZ905
0.016
Anti-rotation
plate
Prevents head from

rotating
10
ZB5-AZ902
0.008
Padlockable
ap
For pushbuttons
Black
ZB4-BZ62
0.090
Red
ZB4-BZ64
0.090
Yellow
ZB4-BZ65
0.090
Blue
ZB4-BZ66
0.090
15151
0.040
ZB4-BZ64
501562
ZB5-AZ902
Plastic
guard
814643
15151
Pushbutton
support
For 35 mm DIN rail,

for use in modular
enclosure (2)
AS-i interface module for 22 control and signalling units

Description
Application
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
XBZ-S43
0.100
Panel xing, in conjunction with a Harmony pushbutton or switch

Prol S7.F
XBZ-S43
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
4 inputs and 4 outputs

supplied directly by the bus
(1) Supplied complete with xing nut.

(2) Marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand.
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 125 of 416
2/43
814648
Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Separate components, accessories and replacement parts
BA 9s bulbs and associated accessories
814647
DL1-CEppp
Rating
Colour
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
LEDs on
BA 9s base
z 24 V
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Green
Red
Yellow
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DL1-CJ0241
DL1-CJ0243
DL1-CJ0244
DL1-CJ0245
DL1-CJ0246
DL1-CJ0483
DL1-CJ0484
DL1-CJ0485
DL1-CD0061
DL1-CD0063
DL1-CD0064
DL1-CD0065
DL1-CD0066
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
DL1-CJ0ppp
814649
z 48 V
6 V - 1,2 W
814652
DL1-CFppp
6 V - 1.2 W
24 V - 2 W
120130 V - 2.4 W
10
10
10
DL1-CB006
DL1-CE024
DL1-CE130
0.002
0.002
0.002
Neon bulbs
120130 V
230240 V
10
10
DL1-CF110
DL1-CF220
0.002
0.002
Bulb extractor
XBF-X13
0.005
Lens cap
tightening tool
Illuminated pushbuttons
with ush push
ZBZ-8
0.009
814650
XBF-X13
814651
ZBZ-8
Weight
kg
Incandescent
bulbs
Replacement keys for Emergency Stop key release heads and key switches
Description
Key number
Reference
Set of 2 keys
455
421E
458A
520E
3131A
4A185
LU1
LU2
LU3
LU4
LU5
LU6
LU7
LU8
LU9
LU10
LU11
LU12
LU13
LU14
8D1
ZBG-455
ZBG-421E
ZBG-458A
ZBG-520E
ZBG-3131A
ZBD-A185
ZBD-LU1
ZBD-LU2
ZBD-LU3
ZBD-LU4
ZBD-LU5
ZBD-LU6
ZBD-LU7
ZBD-LU8
ZBD-LU9
ZBD-LU10
ZBD-LU11
ZBD-LU12
ZBD-LU13
ZBD-LU14
ZBD-8D1
814654
ZBG-455
ZBP-0
814655
Description
Weight
kg
0.013
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
0.014
Clear boots
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/44
Description
For use with

pushbuttons
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Single boots
Flush with circular head

Projecting with circular head
Flush or Projecting with circular
head for food industry applications
10
10
10
ZBP-A
ZBP-0
ZBP-0A
0.002
0.002
0.002
Double boots
Flush or Projecting
double-headed pushbuttons
Flush double-headed pushbuttons
Double-headed pushbuttons for
for food industry applications
10
ZBW-008
0.005
10
10
ZBW-008F
ZBW-008A
0.005
0.005
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Weight
kg
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 126
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Replacement parts
Coloured boots
Description
Colour
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Coloured
boots
(can be replaced
without removing
the head
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
10
10
10
10
10
10
ZB2-BP011
ZB2-BP012
ZB2-BP013
ZB2-BP014
ZB2-BP015
ZB2-BP016
For
Colour
use on
Circular lens caps for light sources with integral LED
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Pilot lights
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
5 different colour grooved lenses (1)
10
10
10
10
10
1
ZBV-0113
ZBV-0133
ZBV-0143
ZBV-0153
ZBV-0163
ZBV-0103S
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.010
Illuminated
pushbuttons
with ush push
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
10
10
10
10
10
ZBW-9113
ZBW-9133
ZBW-9143
ZBW-9153
ZBW-9163
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Square lens caps for light sources with integral LED
10
10
10
10
10
ZBW-9313
ZBW-9333
ZBW-9343
ZBW-9353
ZBW-9363
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
Pilot lights
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
10
10
10
10
10
ZBC-V0113
ZBC-V0133
ZBC-V0143
ZBC-V0153
ZBC-V0163
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
Illuminated
pushbuttons
with ush push
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
10
10
10
10
10
ZBC-W9113
ZBC-W9133
ZBC-W9143
ZBC-W9153
ZBC-W9163
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Circular lens caps for light sources with BA 9s base tting
10
10
10
10
10
ZBC-W9313
ZBC-W9333
ZBC-W9343
ZBC-W9353
ZBC-W9363
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
Pilot lights
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Clear
10
10
10
10
10
10
ZBV-011
ZBV-013
ZBV-014
ZBV-015
ZBV-016
ZBV-017
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
Illuminated
pushbuttons
ush push
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Clear
10
10
10
10
10
10
ZBW-911
ZBW-913
ZBW-914
ZBW-915
ZBW-916
ZBW-917
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
10
10
10
10
10
10
ZBW-931
ZBW-933
ZBW-934
ZBW-935
ZBW-936
ZBW-937
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.013
Lens caps
814656
Illuminated
pushbuttons with
projecting push
ZBV-01p3
814656
Illuminated
pushbuttons with
projecting push
ZBV-01p
Illuminated
pushbuttons with
projecting push
White
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Clear
(1) Clear, Green, Red, Yellow, Blue
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
Weight
kg
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 127 of 416
2/45
References

Harmony style 5
Specific function units, with double insulated bezel
Manual overload reset buttons (travel 10 mm) (1)

Shape
of head
Actuation
distance
mm
Marking
Colour
Reference
Weight
kg
With ush push

XB5-AA
Green
XB5-AA831
0.027
Red
XB5-AA841
0.027
Blue
XB5-AA861
0.027
Red
XB5-AA84101
0.027
Blue
XB5-AA86102
0.027
Without
Green
XB5-AA832
0.040
Red
XB5-AA842
0.040
Blue
XB5-AA862
0.040
Red
XB5-AA84201
0.040
Blue
XB5-AA86202
0.040
17120
Red
XB5-AL84101
0.027
120257
Red
XB5-AL84201
0.040
17120
Without
120257
With projecting push
Heads + mounting base for potentiometer

Shape
of head
Description
Application
Reference
Weight
kg
For potentiometer
with shaft length
44 to 50 mm
(potentiometer
not included)
For shaft 6 mm
ZB5-AD912
0.032
For shaft 6.35 mm
ZB5-AD922
0.032
(1) NEMA type 13.
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/46
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 128
of 416Electric
Schneider
References

Harmony style 5
Specific function units, with double insulated bezel
Joystick controllers (54 mm long operating shaft) (1)

Description
Operation
Spring return
to zero position
Reference
Weight
kg
Without
XD5-PA12
0.060
With
XD5-PA22
0.060
Without
XD5-PA14
0.077
With
XD5-PA24
0.077
Reference
Weight
kg
Complete joystick controllers (screw clamp terminal connections)

2 direction
XD5-PA12
1 notch
1 N/O contact
per direction
4 direction
1 notch
1 N/O contact
per direction
Sub-assemblies for joystick controllers

Description
For use with
ZD5-PA103
ZD5-PA203
Complete body/contact
assemblies (screw clamp
terminal connections)
2 direction controllers
ZD5-PA103
0.049
4 direction controllers
ZD5-PA203
0.058
Complete head assemblies

with operating shaft
2 direction, stay put
ZD5-PA12
0.022
2 direction, spring return to zero position
ZD5-PA22
0.022
4 direction, stay put
ZD5-PA14
0.022
4 direction, spring return to zero position
ZD5-PA24
0.022
2 direction
Black one side

Red reverse
ZBG-2201
0.001
White one side

Yellow reverse
ZBG-2401
0.001
Black one side

Red reverse
ZBG-4201
0.002
White one side

Yellow reverse
ZBG-4401
0.002
Supply
voltage
V
Reference
Weight
z 1224 - 50/60 Hz
XB5-DSB
0.045
a 120 - 60 Hz
XB5-DSG
0.045
a 230240 - 50 Hz
XB5-DSM
0.045
z 24 - 50/60 Hz
XB5-KSB
0.035
a 120 - 50/60 Hz
XB5-KSG
0.035
a 230240 - 50 Hz
XB5-KSM
0.035
For use with
Reference
Weight
kg
Legends
30 x 48 mm
for engraving
Legends
48 x 48 mm
for engraving
ZD5-PA12
4 direction
Hour counters (2)

Characteristics
Indication 09999.9
p
XB5-DSp
kg
Annunciators (IP 40 NEMA 1) (2)

85 db buzzer
with continuous or
intermittent operation
(connection diagram:
see page 2/54)
Fuse carrier (2)

p
XB5-KSp
Description
Fuse carrier
XB5-DT1S
5 x 20 mm fuse
6.3 A - 250 V
(1) It is not permissible to use standard contact blocks ZBE-100 (single) or ZBE-20p (double).
(2) Replacement parts: fixing nut ZB5-AZ901, anti-rotation plate: ZB5-AZ902, tightening key: ZB5-AZ905.
Other versions
Joystick controllers and complete body/contact assemblies for joystick controllers with
Faston connnector terminals (6.35 or 2 x 2.8).
XB5-DT1S
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
0.022
Dimensions:
pages 2/48 to 2/55
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 129 of 416
2/47
Dimensions

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Completed units with contacts
p + ZB5-AZp
ppp
ZB5-APp
Common face view
41,5
p + ZB5-AZp
ppp
ZB5-ALp
41,5
Pushbuttons, spring return

pp + ZB5-AZp
ppp + ZBE-p
ppp
ZB5-AAp
13,5
43
23,6 (1)
17,5
30
43
43
Pushbuttons, spring return

Mushroom head
ppp
ZB5-AC2 + ZB5-AZp
Double-headed
pppp + ZB5-AZp
ppp
ZB5-ALp
47
43
38,5
30
40
13,5
43
30
e
43
ppp,
ZB5-AS14 + ZB5-AZp
ppp
ZB5-AS944 + ZB5-AZp
Common face view
43
e: panel thickness 1 to 6 mm.

(1) Additional row of contacts or double contact.
Emergency stop and mushroom head pushbuttons
ppp,
ppp,
ZB5-AT4 + ZB5-AZp
ZB5-AS54 + ZB5-AZp
ppp
ppp
ZB5-AT84 + ZB5-AZp
ZB5-AS844 + ZB5-AZp
38,5
39
22
39
43

Selector switches
Standard handle operator
ppp + ZB5-AZp
ppp
ZB5-ADp
40
43
43
25
47
41,5
Long handle operator

pp + ZB5-AZp
ppp
ZB5-AJp
30
25
43
30
e
43
Key switches
pp + ZB5-AZp
pp p
ZB5-AGp
47
22
21
30
e
43
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/48
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 130
of 416Electric
Schneider
Dimensions

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Completed units with light functions with and without
contacts
Pilot lights
Integral LED
Direct supply
p
p/AVGp
p/AVMp
p + ZB5-AV0p
pp ZB5-AV6 + ZB5-AV0p
ZB5-AVBp
Common face view
41,5

p
ZB5-AV3/AV4 + ZB5-AV0p
11
11,5
11,5
43
30
43
66

pp + ZB5-AW3p
p
ZB5-AW0p
13,5
13,5
Common face view
41,5

Illuminated pushbuttons
Integral LED
Direct supply
pp + ZB5-AW3p
p
ppp + ZB5-AW3p
pp + ZBE-p
ppp ZB5-AW0p
ZB5-AWp
13,5
43
30
87
43
23,6 (1)
Illuminated selector switches

Integral LED
ppp + ZB5-AW0p
ppp
ZB5-AK1p
47
41,5
Double-headed illuminated pushbuttons with pilot light

Integral LED
ppp + ZB5-AW8p
ppppp
ZB5-AW0p
25
13,5
30
30
e
43
43

(1) Additional row of contacts or double contact.
Support panel cut-out for pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights (1)
Screw clamp terminal and
Printed circuit board
plug-in connector models
connection models
Spigot location detail view
40 min.
30 min.
r max. = 0.8
22.5 recommended (22.3 0+0.4 )
30 min.
30 min.
(1) Fixing centres for pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights tted with Faston connector terminals: 32 x 45 min.
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 131 of 416
2/49
Dimensions (continued)

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Sub-assemblies, ZB5-A: contact functions
Heads for pushbuttons, spring return

ZB5-AAp, AAppp,
ZB5-ALp, ALppp
ZB5-AAp8
28
31
32,5
ZB5-CLp
28
Common
face view
ZB5pp
APp
pS
APp
Heads for pushbuttons

Lockable Push-turn
ZB5-AFD
ZB5-AH0p
ZB5-AHp
28,5
40
a
36.5
33
30
32,5
22
ZB5-APpp
ZB5-APpS
36,5
30
ZB5-CAp, CA0
Common
face view
28
Common
face view
32,5
ZB5-CH0p
30
30
28
Heads for double-headed pushbuttons, spring return

ZB5-AA81pp,
ZB5-AL83pp,
Common
ZB5-AA82pp
ZB5-AL84pp
face view
ZB5-AA91pp,
ZB5-AA92pp
ZB5-AL93pp,
ZB5-AL94pp
35
35
Common
face view
31,5
31,5
Heads for pushbuttons

Mushroom head
ZB5-ACp4
50
47
ZB5-AAp4, AAp6
27,5
ZB5-ACp, ARp
30
ZB5-ARp16
52
52
45
ZB5p
ACp
p
ARp
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/50
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
60
40
60
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 132
of 416Electric
Schneider
Dimensions

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Mushroom heads for pushbuttons, latching

Push-pull
ZB5-ATp4
p, AXp
p
ZB5-ATp
56
56
ZB5p
ATp
p
AXp
Turn to release
p, AS834
ZB5-AS4p
40
60
p, AS844, AS6p
p
ZB5-AS5p
57
57
Key release
p, AS934
ZB5-AS7p
22
ZB5p, AS844
AS5p
p
AS6p
40
60
ZB5p, AS944
AS1p
p, AS964
AS2p
40
60
p, AS2p
p, AS944, AS964
ZB5-AS1p
57
30
22
57
ZB5-AS14D
25
58
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 133 of 416
2/51

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Heads for selector switches

Standard handle
ZB5-ADp, ADpM
38
Long handle
ZB5-AJp, AJpM
28,5
44
28,5
44
Knurled knob
ZB5-ADp9
Key switches (Ronis n 455)

ZB5-AGp, AG0p, AGpM
44
22
40
28,5
Key switches (DOM n 8D1)

ZB5-AGD
25
40,5
28,5
Heads for toggle switches

ZB5-ADp8
45
28,5
Bodies for pushbuttons and switches

ZB5-AZ10p, AZ141
41,5
41,5
Plug-in connector
ZB5-AZ10p4, AZ1414
31,5
31,5
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/52
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 134
of 416Electric
Schneider
Dimensions

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Sub-assemblies, ZB5-A: light functions with and without
contacts
Heads for pilot lights, with light source

Integral LED
Incandescent, neon or LED
ZB5-AV0p3
ZB5-AV0p, AV0pS
Common face view
30
ZB5-CV0p3, CH3p3
30,5
28,5
28,5
30,5
32
41,5
Via integral transformer, for BA 9s bulb

ZB5-AVp, AVpDp
41,5
41,5
Bodies for pilot lights, screw clamp terminal connections

Integral LED
Direct supply, for BA 9s bulb
ZB5-AVpp
ZB5-AV6
30
55
32
41,5
Bodies for pilot lights, plug-in connector

Integral LED
ZB5-AVpp4
32
Heads for illuminated pushbuttons, spring return, for light source

LED
ZB5-AW3p3, AW3p3S
ZB5-AW1p3,
Common face view
ZB5-AAp8
ZB5-ALp8
30
ZB5-AW9p3
30
32,5
ZB5-CW3p3
ZB5-CW1p3
Common
face view
30
ZB5-AW5p3
36,5
BA 9s incandescent bulb
ZB5-AW3p, AW3pS
31,5
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
30
29,5
ZB5-AW1p
31,5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
34
30
Common face view
28,5
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 135 of 416
2/53

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Sub-assemblies, ZB5-A: light functions with and without
contacts
Common face view
Mushroom heads for latching pushbuttons

ZB5-AW7p3
47
Heads for double-headed pushbuttons with pilot light

ZB5-AW81ppp3,
ZB5-AW83ppp3,
ZB5-AW82ppp3
ZB5-AW84ppp3
49,5
31,5
31,5
Heads for push-push to release illuminated pushbuttons

ZB5-AH0p3
ZB5-AHp3
Common face view
Heads for illuminated selector switches, standard handle

ZB5-AK1ppp3
32,5
30
40
27,5
42,5
41,5
Bodies for illuminated pushbuttons and selector switches, screw clamp terminal connections
Bodies for illuminated
Integral LED
Direct supply, for BA 9s bulb
Via integral transformer, for BA 9s bulb pushbuttons and selector
ZB5-AW0ppp
pDp
pp
ZB5-AW06p
ZB5-AW0pp, AW0p
switches, plug-in connector
Integral LED
ZB5-AW0ppp4
43,5
23
23
Manual overload reset buttons

ppp
XB5-A8p
18
23
75
31,5
31,5
ppp
XB5-AL8p
22,5
Common face view
31,5
Head + mounting base

for potentiometer
p2
ZB5-AD9p
27
(1)
(1)
(1) Value not yet available.

p2
XD5-PAp
p4
XD5-PAp
47
Common face view
66
23
66
108
47
30
132

Hour counters
p
XB5-DSp
Annunciators
p
XB5-KSp
Connection diagram
p
XB5-KSp
1+
Intermittent
30
30
11,5
30
11
30
Continuous
59,7
60
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
2/54
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 136
of 416Electric
Schneider
Mounting

Harmony style 5
insulated bezel
Connecting control units to printed circuit board

Panel cut-out (viewed from installer's side)
Dimensions in mm
Y
Installation precautions:
Minimum thickness of circuit board: 1.6 mm
Cut-out diameter: 22.5 mm recommended (22.3
+0.4
0
)
Orientation of xing collar/pillar ZB5-AZ079: 2 30'

(excluding cut-outs marked a and b).
Fixing screw ZBZ-006 tightening torque: 0.6 N.m
Allow for xing collar/pillar XB5-AZ079 and xing screws every
90 mm horizontally (X), and 120 mm vertically (Y)
(for cut-outs on 30 x 40 mm xing centres).
The xing centres marked a and b are diagonally opposed and
must align with those on the printed circuit board marked 4 and
5.
X
a
Head ZB5-Ap
Panel
Nut
ZB5-AZ079
ZBZ-010
Printed circuit board
Printed circuit board drillings (viewed from electrical block side)

Dimensions in mm
Y
24,2 = =
12
ZBZ-006
6,1
4
= =
51,45
2,90,1
5
5,4
5,08
5,4
12,7
6,35
53,85
Mounting with adaptor (socket) ZBZ-010:

1 2 elongated holes for ZBZ-006 screw access
4
2
2 1 hole 2.4 mm ( 0.05) for centering adaptor ZBZ-010
(12,1)
3 8 holes 1.2 mm
4 1 hole 2.9 mm ( 0.05) for centering printed circuit board
(with cut-out marked a)
5 1 elongated hole for orientating the printed circuit board

(with cut-out marked b)
4
18,10,1
Dimensions An + 18.1 are those to the 2.4 mm ( 0.05) holes

for centering the adaptor ZBZ-010.
A: 30 min.
B: 30 min.
General tolerances of the panel and printed circuit board
The cumulative tolerance must not exceed 0.3 mm: T1 + T2 = 0.3 mm maximum.
General:
pages 2/0 to 2/5
Characteristics:
pages 2/6 to 2/9
Schneider
Electric
References:
pages 2/10 to 2/47
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 137 of 416
2/55
POWER DISTRIBUTION
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 138 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 139 of 416
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 140 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 141 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 142 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 143 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 144 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 145 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 146 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 147 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 148 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 149 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 150 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 151 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 152 of 416
MOTOR STARTERS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 153 of 416
Schemes
TeSys motor starters - open version
Star-delta starters
Schemes
Star-delta starters
6
W1
4
V1
2
1
2
2
W2
U2
6
5
6
4
3
2
1
W1
W2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation

(standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
KM1
V1
V2
U1
U2
KM3
2
KM2
V2
L2
L3
U1
L1
1
LC3F185 to F400
3
4
F1
95
21
96
F1
67
KM2
68
154
KM1
6
172
184
14
153
13 22
Remote
control
KM1
55
171
183
KM1
KA1
54
61
KM2
14
56
53
13
KM2
KM3
A1
A1
KM3
A2
KA1
A2
KM2
A2
KM1
A2
F2
A1
A1
62
8
9
10
Presentation:
page 1/44
References:
pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 154 of 416
1/51
Presentation
107983
TeSys U starter-controllers
Presentation
The TeSys U starter-controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following
functions:
b Protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors:
v isolation and breaking function,
v overload and short-circuit protection,
v thermal overload protection,
v power switching.
b Control of the application:
v protection function alarms, application monitoring (running time, number of faults,
motor current values, ...),
v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values).
1
2
These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which
simply clip into the power base.
This late customisation is even possible after power and control circuit wiring has
been completed.
TeSys U starter-controller
TeSys U is a flexible range that meets the current and future needs of system
builders, panel builders and machine manufacturers, as well as those of additional
systems.
From design through to operation, TeSys U offers many advantages and simplifies
the selection of components in comparison with a traditional solution.
- the breaking, isolation and contactor functions are incorporated in a single block;
this means fewer references to be ordered and easy selection without any risk of
error, because a single reference covers all needs up to 15 Kw.
- the control unit has a wide setting range. It can operate on a d.c. or a.c. supply.
The number of references required is divided by 10, compared with traditional
solutions.
4
5
538849
The compact components in the TeSys U range are mounted on a single rail, so
optimising the amount of space required in enclosures. By eliminating power wiring
between the circuit-breaker and contactor, TeSys U reduces installation times in
enclosures.
Setting-up accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components
and eliminate the risk of errors.
Starter-controller
Consists of a power base and a control unit.
8
9
Power bases 1
The power base is independent of the control voltage.
It is available from 0 to 15kW at 400 V.
It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400V, total
coordination (continuity of service) and the switching function.
b 2 ratings are available: 012 A and 032 A.
b Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B).
Control units 2
These must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to
be protected and the type of protection required.
b Standard control unit (LUCA): satisfies the basic protection requirements for
motor starters: overload and short-circuit.
b Magnetic control unit (LUCL): when fitted upstream of a variable speed drive or
soft start-soft stop unit and used in conjunction with an LUB12 or LUB32 power
base, this unit provides isolation and short-circuit protection of the motor starter.
b Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD): allows additional advanced
functions such as alarm, fault differentiation,...
b Multifunction control unit (LUCM): suitable for the most sophisticated control
and protection requirements.
The control units are interchangeable without rewiring and without using tools.
They have a wide range of adjustment (range of 4) and low heat dissipation, due to
the fact that bimetallic overload protection components are no longer used.
10
(1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.
1/52
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 155 of 416
Presentation (continued)
538852
Control options
Function modules can be used to increase the functions of the starter-controller.

Function modules 3
Must be used in conjunction with advanced control units.
4 types are available:
b Thermal overload alarm (LUF W10).
b Thermal fault and manual reset (LUF DH11).
b Thermal fault and automatic or remote reset (LUF DA01 and LUF DA10).
b Indication of motor load (LUF V2), which can also be used in conjunction with the
multifunction control unit.
1
2
All alarm and fault information processed by these modules is available on digital
contacts.
3
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
538850
Communication modules 3
The information processed is exchanged:
b Via a parallel bus:
v parallel wiring module (LUF C00).
Via a serial bus:
AS-Interface modules (ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51),
Profibus DP module (LUL C07),
CANopen module (LUL C08),
DeviceNet module (LUL C09),
Advantys STB module (LUL C15).
Modbus modules (LUL C031 and LUL C033).
They must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit and require a

c24V supply voltage.
Connection to other protocols, such as Fipio, is possible via gateway modules
(LUFP) or via the TeSysPort for Ethernet.
Auxiliary contact modules (LUFN) 3

3 possible configurations: 2 N/O, 1 N/O + 1 N/C or 2 N/C.
Auxiliary contacts 4
They provide the following information: fault signalling and rotary knob in "ready"
position.
538851
Power options
Reverser block 5
Allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation.
The reverser block (LU2M) is mounted directly beneath the power base without
modifying the width of the product (45 mm). The reverser block (LU6M) is mounted
separately from the power base when the height available is limited.
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB
This unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be
increased up to 130 kA at 400 V, with a visible break.
Setting-up accessories
Plug-in terminal blocks 6

The control terminal blocks are of the plug-in type, so allowing wiring to be prepared
away from the machine or the replacement of products without rewiring.
7
Control circuit pre-wiring system 7

Numerous pre-wired accessories provide simple, clip-in connections, e.g.
connection of reverser control terminals, ...
9
10
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 156 of 416
1/53
Structure of a motor starter
Mirror auxiliary contacts built-in

as standard, mechanically
linked to the power poles
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Coil cut-out contact built into

the handle as standard
Disconnection and breaking
A2
A1
6/T3
22/NC
21/NC
14/NO
Low consumption
technology coil
5/L3
1/L1
2/T1
Power switching
4/T2
Control unit
Overload protection
3/L2
13/NO
Short-ciircuit protection
Pre-wiring
6/T3
Reverser
4/T2
Motor starter structure
2/T1
Control unit
4
5
82
84
81
A2
B1
A1
B3
A3
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
Reverser
Disconnection and breaking

Short-ciircuit protection
Power switching
Variable speed
controller
Variable speed control
In
Understanding the commercial references through a comparison with a traditional motor starter
7
12 Amp
category AC3
Nonreversing
Contactor
family
Coil voltage :
110 V 50/60 Hz
TeSys D
Circuitbreaker
family
Startercontroller
family
1/54
TeSys D
Auxiliary contact (for cut-out of contactor coil)
Power combination block
Wide range
control unit
Standard
Power base
10
Rating
Size of product 2
(45 mm wide)
For ratings
up to 12 A
REVISION: A
Startercontroller
family
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
Control voltage
e.g.. : 110240 V
AC/DC
Rating
e.g.. : 312 A
page: 157 of 416
Selection
CONTROL UNIT
POWER BASE
For D.O.L. starting

non-reversing
Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz

Setting range
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts built-in as standard.

For D.O.L. starting
reversing
Reference to be completed by adding the voltage code
Reference to be completed by
adding the voltage code
Control circuit voltages (V)
or
Reference
Rating
4
5
Auxiliary contacts
6
Auxiliary contacts
Number of contacts
Auxiliary contacts
Power pole status

References
Signalling contacts
Signalling contacts
Power base
Number of contacts
Fault signalling
Position of rotary knob
Removable terminal
block
References
10
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 158 of 416
1/55
Standard control unit
Magnetic control unit
LUCL
For use with a

variable speed
controller or a soft
start-soft stop unit
LUCA
Class 10 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)
b Protection against overloads and shortcircuits.

b Protection against phase failure and
phase imbalance.
b Earth fault protection (equipment
protection only).
b Manual reset.
(see page 1/134)
b Short-circuit protection
b Manual Reset
Motor thermal overload protection must
be provided by the variable speed
controller or soft starter.
4
1
2
3
Power base
LUB or LU2B
Thermal overload signalling

module and manual reset
LUF DH11
(see page 1/71)
Thermal overload signalling

modules and automatic or
remote reset
LUF DA01 and LUF DA10
(see page 1/71)
Thermal overload alarm

module
LUF W10
(see page 1/71)
Motor load indication module

LUF V2
(see page 1/71)
Auxiliary contact modules

LUF Npp
(see page 1/65)
Parallel wiring module

LUF C00
(see page 1/76)
7
8
3
Fault signalling contacts

LUA1pp (Depending on configuration)
(see page 1/65)
10
Note: the colour indicates possible combinations with the selected control unit.
Example: function module LUF DH11 can only be used with an advanced control unit.
1/56
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 159 of 416
Advanced control unit
Multifunction control unit
LUCB
Class 10 - 3-phase
LUCC
Class 10 - single-phase
LUCM
LUCD
b
b
v
v
v
v
Classes 5 to 30 - single-phase and 3-phase

(see page 1/70)
Class 20 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)
Same functions as the standard control unit

In addition, in conjunction with a function module:
fault differentiation with manual reset,
fault differentiation with remote or automatic reset,
thermal overload alarm,
indication of motor load.
b Same functions as the standard control unit

b In addition, reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic.
b Protection function alarm.
b Indication on front panel or on remote terminal via Modbus RS
485 port.
b Log function.
b Monitoring function, indication of main motor parameters on
front panel of the control unit, or via a remote terminal
b Differentiation of thermal overload and magnetic fault.
b Overload, no-load running.
3
4
5
AS-Interface
communication modules (1)
ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
(see page 1/78)
Profibus DP
communication module (1)
LUL C07
(see page 1/80)
CANopen
LULC08
(see page 1/84)
DeviceNet
LUL C09
(see page 1/86)
Advantys STB
LULC15
(see page 1/90)
6
7
Modbus
communication modules (1)
LUL C031 and LUL C033
(see page 1/92)
8
9
10
(1)Communication modules can only be combined with a c 24 V control unit (LUCp pp BL).
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 160 of 416
1/57
Application examples
525971
Application
Starting and protection of a pump.
Operating conditions
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
Power: 4 kW at 400 V.
In: 9 A.
Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour.
Duty class S3.
3-wire control:
Start button (S2),
Stop button (S1),
Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.
Products used
Description
Power base
12 A with screw clamp connections
Item
1
Quantity Reference
1
LUB12
LUCA12FU
5/L3
3/L2
Scheme
230 V
13
6
C.U.
A1
A2
4/T2
6/T3
W1
V1
U1
2/T1
14
7
M
3
8
9
10
1/58
1/69
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.

b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of
service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact.
b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
1/L1
510901
Functions performed
Page
1/62
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 161 of 416
510902
Application
Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation.
Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in
order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to
thermal overload.
Additional products used

Description
Item
Quantity Reference
Page
Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal
overload alarm function module.
Advanced control unit
Alarm function module
2
3
LUCB12FU
LUF W10
1
1
1/69
1/71
Functions performed
b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by

the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable.
b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.
3
4
230 V
5/L3
3/L2
Scheme
1/L1
13
A1
LUF W10
07
Alarms Module
08
To
application
A2
4/T2
6/T3
W1
V1
U1
2/T1
14
C.U.
M
3
Other versions
The advanced control unit can provide other functions,

depending on the type of function modules used (instead of
the LUF W module described above):
- thermal fault signalling with function modules LUFDA01,
LUFDA10 or LUFDH11,
- indication of motor load with function module LUFV2. This
module delivers a 4-20 mA analogue signal, which is
proportional to the average 3-phase current drawn by the
motor. This allows the load current to be monitored and
provides access to other application functions using this
value, or to predictive or preventive maintenance
possibilities (replacement of the motor before it breaks
down).
7
8
9
10
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 162 of 416
1/59
520971
Application
Manual control of a 2-position turntable.
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
b
Power: 2.2 kW at 400 V.

In: 6 A.
30 starts per hour
Duty class S4.
3-wire control:
Pushbutton for Position 1 (S1),
Pushbutton for Position 2 (S2),
Stop button (S5),
Stopping at the positions is achieved by limit switches S3 and S4.
Control circuit voltage: a 115 V.
Products used
Description
Power base, reversing,
12 A with screw clamp connections
523761
Item
1
Quantity Reference
1
LU2B12FU
Page
1/63
LUCA12FU
1/69
Functions performed

b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9MR1C included on
base LU2B12. The design of the reversing power block makes mechanical
interlocking unnecessary.
V1
M
3
6/T3
W1
U1
2/T1
4/T2
C.U.
115 V
10
1/60
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 163 of 416
A2
A1
Reverser Motor Controller
B3
A3
LU2B
B1
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
Scheme (manual control)
520969
Application
Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid dry

running, which could lead to destruction of the pump.
b
b
b
b
b
Power: 15 kW at 400 V.
In: 28.5 A.
Duty class S1.
Control circuit voltage: c 24 V.
Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Products used
510903
Description
Power base 32 A without connections
Multifunction control unit
Modbus communication module
Pre-wired coil connection
Connection of communication module
output terminals to the coil terminals
Connection cable for connecting the
communication module to the serial bus
T-junction
Functions performed
Item
1
2
3
4
Quantity
1
1
1
1
Reference
LUB320
LUCM 32BL
LUL C033
LU9B N11C
Page
1/62
1/70
1/93
1/93
VW3A8306Rpp
1/93
VW3 A8 306 TF03
1/93

b Load switching (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction
control unit.
b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following
parameters must be entered:
v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s),
v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
current. If the ratio remains below this threshold for the time specified in the previous
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %).
b Indication of the various motor starter statuses and currents.
3
4
3
4
5
6
LUL C033
24 V 24 V
c Aux COM
D (B)
D (A)
Gnd
LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil
Modbus Module
LO1
LI1
LI2
D (B)
D (A)
Gnd
5/L3
Multifunction
Control Unit
4 5 8
M
3
24 V
4 5 8
C.U.
W1 6/T3
Status (Register 455)

Ready (available)
Poles closed
Fault
Alarms
Tripped
Reserved reset enabled
A1-A2 powered
Motor running
Motor current % (bit 0)
Reserved
Motor starting
V1 4/T2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
LUCM
24 V Aux
U1 2/T1
Modbus profile IEC 64915

Commands (Register 704)
Forward running
Reverse running
Reserved
Reset
Reserved
Connection test
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 3-phase control
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
3/L2
1/L1
Schemes
Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03
Other functions
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions,
such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm,
Module LUL C033 also provides a programmable output and two configurable
discrete inputs.
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 164 of 416
1/61
10
References
Two versions of control connection configuration are available:

b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories) or when a reverser block is to be mounted
by the customer.
561330
520739
Non-reversing power bases
Power bases for non-reversing D.O.L. starting (1)

Connection
Power
Control
Item
(2)
Rating
y 440 V 500 V
A
A
Reference
Weight
690 V
A
kg
These bases have 2 auxiliary contacts: 1 N/O(13-14) and 1 N/C(21-22) which

indicate the closed or open position of the power poles.
A low power internal contact allows power supply to the control unit to be switched off
when the rotary knob is no longer in the ON position.
LUB p20
LUB p2
The power bases must be used in conjunction with a control unit, see pages 1/68 to 1/70
510904
Screw
clamp
terminals
Screw
clamp
terminals
1+2+3
+4
Without
1+2
connections
1
2
12
12
LUB12
0.900
32
23
21
LUB32
0.900
12
12
LUB120
0.865
32
23
21
LUB320
0.865
Terminal block for power bases without connections

Connection
For base
Item
(2)
3+4
Reference
Weight
kg
0.045
(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below.
For higher values, use current limiters, see page 1/66
Volts
230
440
500
690 (3)
kA
50
50
10
4
(2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.
LUB p2
Other versions
LUB120 or 320
LU9BN11
Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device

(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate
fuses).
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 to 1/98
1/62
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
Schemes:
pages 1/112 to 1/119
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 165 of 416
References
Reversing power bases
561270
Two versions of control connection configuration are available:

b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories).
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, pre-assembled
Connection
Power
Control
Item
(1)
Rating
y 440 V 500 V
A
A
Reference, to
be completed) (2)
690 V
A
Weight
kg
These bases have two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate nonreversing and reversing operating status.
Screw
clamp
terminals
Screw
clamp
terminals
Without
connections
1 + 2 + 3 12
+4+5
32
12
23
9
21
LU2B12pp
LU2B32pp
1.270
1.270
1 + 2 + 3 12
+5
32
12
23
9
21
LU2BA0pp
LU2BB0pp
1.270
1.250
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting

for customer assembly
A reverser block should preferably be combined with a non-reversing power base

without connections to create a reversing starter-controller.
The built-in N/O (13-14) and N/C(21-22) contacts are used for electrical interlocking
between the reverser block and the base; they are therefore no longer available as
output contacts.
The reverser block has two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate
non-reversing and reversing operating status.
510905
LU2B p2
32 A reverser block
Connection
Power
For mounting directly
Screw clamp
beneath the power base terminals
For mounting separately Screw clamp
from the base
terminals
(screw or rail fixing)
Item (1)
Control
Without
3
connections
Without
6
connections
Reference, to
be completed) (2)
2
3
4
Weight
kg
LU2M B0pp
0.400
LU6M B0pp
0.425
Accessories
Description Item
Control
terminal
block
Application
Reference
Reversing power base without

LU9 M1
connections LU2B A0pp or B0pp
Reverser block LU2M B0pp
LU9 M1
for direct mounting beneath power base
LU9 M1
for mounting separately from power base
LU9M R1
for mounting separately from power base
Weight
kg
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.030
Control circuit pre-wiring components

Description
Weight
kg
Pre-wired connector (3)
5
LU9M R1C
0.035
(1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit.
Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts
24
4872
110240
c
BL
a
B
c or a
ES (4)
FU (5)
(3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.
510906
LU2B p2
Other versions
7
Item
Reference
Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device

(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses).
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
7
8
9
10
LU6M + LU9M1 + LU9MR1
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 to 1/98
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 166 of 416
1/63
Presentation
Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
Contact states depending on the product status
Position
of rotary
knob
Indication N/O pole

on front
contact
panel
N/C pole
contact
N/O
contact
any fault
N/C ontact
any fault
LUFN11
31-32
LUA1C20
97-98
LUA1C11
95-96
or
LUFN02
31-32
41-42
LUA1C200 LUA1C110
No terminal No terminal
block
block
LUA1C200
No terminal
block
or
LUFN20
33-34
43-44
LUB9N11
21-22
LUA1C11
17-18
or
LUFN11
43-44
LUA1C110
No terminal
block
or
LUB9N11
13-14
1
References of add-on contact blocks
and auxiliary contact modules
Terminal referencing
2
3
4
Off
OFF
Start
Tripped on
thermal overload
Manual reset mode
TRIP
I>>
TRIP
Automatic reset on thermal

overload fault mode
Remote reset mode
LUA1C20
17-18
Ready to operate
Tripped on short-circuit
N/O contact
product
ready
N/O contact
in closed position.
N/C contact
in open position.
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
page 1/98
1/64
Schemes:
page 1/112
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 167 of 416
References
Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
568764
References
Auxiliary contacts
Signalling and composition
4
6
1
2
5
LUB + LUA1 + LUFN + LUA8E20
Cabling
Item
Reference
Weight
kg
0.030
1 N/C fault signalling

contact (95-96) and
1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob
in ready position
Screw clamp
terminals
1+2
LUA1 C11
Without
connections
LUA1 C110
0.012
1 N/O fault signalling

contact (97-98) and
1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob
in ready position
Screw clamp
terminals
1+2
LUA1 C20
0.030
Without
connections
LUA1 C200
0.012
2 N/O contacts
Contacts open, rotary knob
in OFF position
Contacts closed, rotary knob
in ready position
Screw clamp
terminals
LUA8E20
0.048
Auxiliary contact modules for connection by screw clamp terminals

Module with 2 contacts indicating the status of the starter-controller power poles
Operation: a or c 24250 V, I th: 5 A
Composition
Item
Reference
2 N/O contacts (33-34 and 43-44)
LUF N20
Weight
kg
0.050
1 N/C contact (31-32) and 1 N/O contact (43-44)
LUF N11
0.050
2 N/C contacts (31-32 and 41-42)
LUF N02
0.050
Item
Reference
Screw clamp
LUA1 C110
terminal blocks
LU9B C11
Weight
kg
0.022
LUA1 C200
LU9B C20
0.022
Location for auxiliary contact,

communication or
function module
Location for add-on
contact blocks
LU9C 1
0.020
LU9C 2
0.010
Accessories
Description
Blanking
covers
For use on
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
page 1/98
Schemes:
page 1/112
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 168 of 416
1/65
CONTACTOR CONTROL UNIT
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 169 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
LUCA05BL
standard control unit LUCA - class 10 - 1.25...5

A - 24 V DC
Range of product
TeSys U
Device short name
LUCA
Product or component
type
ASILUFC5
ASILUFC51
LUFC00
LUFN..
LULC031
LULC033
LULC07
LULC08
LULC09
LULC15
AC-41
AC-43
AC-44
Motor power kW
1.5 kW at 400...440 V AC 50/60 Hz

2.2 kW at 500 V AC 50/60 Hz
3 kW at 690 V AC 50/60 Hz
[Uc] control circuit voltage
24 V DC
Complementary
Main function available
Earth fault protection

Manual reset
Protection against overload and short-circuit
Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance
Mounting mode
Plug-in
Mounting location
Front side
Thermal protection adjustment range
1.25...5 A
Control circuit voltage limits
20...27 V for DC circuit 24 V in operation
Typical current consumption
60 mA at 24 V DC I rms sealed with LUB12

130 mA at 24 V DC I maximum while closing with LUB12
Operating time
35 ms opening with LUB12 for control circuit

70 ms closing with LUB12 for control circuit
Load type
3-phase motor - cooling: self-cooled
Tripping threshold
14.2 x Ir +/- 20 %
600 V conforming to UL 508

600 V conforming to CSA 22-2 No 14
690 V conforming to IEC 60947-1
6 kV conforming to IEC 60947-6-2
Safe separation of circuit
400 V SELV between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit conforming to IEC 60947-1
400 V SELV between the control and auxiliary circuits conforming to IEC 60947-1
Product weight
0.135 kg
Mon Oct
11 10:46:40 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 170 of 416
Main
Environment
Heat dissipation
2 W for control circuit with LUB12

Immunity to microbreaks
3 ms
Immunity to voltage dips
70 % 500 ms conforming to IEC 61000-4-11
Standards
CSA C22-2 No 14 type E

EN 60947-6-2
IEC 60947-6-2
UL 508 type E with phase barrier
ABS
ASEFA
ATEX
BV
CCC
CSA
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
GL
GOST
LROS (Lloyds register of shipping)
UL
IP degree of protection
IP20 front panel and wired terminals conforming to IEC 60947-1

IP20 other faces conforming to IEC 60947-1
IP40 front panel outside connection zone conforming to IEC 60947-1
TH conforming to IEC 60068
-25...60 C with LUCM

-25...70 C with LUCA, LUCB, LUCC, LUCD
-40...85 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Fire resistance
650 C conforming to IEC 60695-2-12

960 C parts supporting live components conforming to IEC 60695-2-12
Shock resistance
10 gn power poles open conforming to IEC 60068-2-27

15 gn power poles closed conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
2 gn 5...300 Hz power poles open conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

4 gn 5...300 Hz power poles closed conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Resistance to electrostatic discharge
8 kV level 4 on contact conforming to IEC 61000-4-2

8 kV level 3 in open air conforming to IEC 61000-4-2
Resistance to radiated fields
10 V/m 3 conforming to IEC 61000-4-3
2 kV class 3 serial link conforming to IEC 61000-4-4

4 kV class 4 all circuits except for serial link conforming to IEC 61000-4-4
Immunity to radioelectric fields
10 V conforming to IEC 61000-4-6
4Q2009
RoHS EUR status
Will be compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 171 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
LUCA12BL
standard control unit LUCA - class 10 - 3...12 A

- 24 V DC
Range of product
TeSys U
Device short name
LUCA
type
ASILUFC5
ASILUFC51
LUFC00
LUFN..
LULC031
LULC033
LULC07
LULC08
LULC09
LULC15
AC-41
AC-43
AC-44
Motor power kW
5.5 kW at 400...440 V AC 50/60 Hz

5.5 kW at 500 V AC 50/60 Hz
9 kW at 690 V AC 50/60 Hz
24 V DC
Complementary

Manual reset
Mounting mode
Plug-in
Mounting location
Front side
3...12 A

Operating time

Load type
Tripping threshold
14.2 x Ir +/- 20 %

Product weight
0.135 kg
Mon Oct
11 10:45:04 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 172 of 416
Main
Environment
Heat dissipation

3 ms
Standards

EN 60947-6-2
IEC 60947-6-2
ABS
ASEFA
ATEX
BV
CCC
CSA
GL
GOST
UL


-40...85 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Fire resistance

Shock resistance




4Q2009
RoHS EUR status
Will be compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 173 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
LUCA18BL
standard control unit LUCA - class 10 - 4.5...18

A - 24 V DC
Range of product
TeSys U
Device short name
LUCA
type
ASILUFC5
ASILUFC51
LUFC00
LUFN..
LULC031
LULC033
LULC07
LULC08
LULC09
LULC15
AC-41
AC-43
AC-44
Motor power kW
7.5 kW at 400...440 V AC 50/60 Hz

9 kW at 500 V AC 50/60 Hz
15 kW at 690 V AC 50/60 Hz
24 V DC
Complementary

Manual reset
Mounting mode
Plug-in
Mounting location
Front side
4.5...18 A

Operating time

Load type
Tripping threshold
14.2 x Ir +/- 20 %

Product weight
0.135 kg
Mon Oct
11 11:04:32 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 174 of 416
Main
Environment
Heat dissipation
3 ms
Standards

EN 60947-6-2
IEC 60947-6-2
ABS
ASEFA
ATEX
BV
CCC
CSA
GL
GOST
UL


-40...85 C
Operating altitude
2000 m
Fire resistance

Shock resistance




4Q2009
RoHS EUR status
Will be compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 175 of 416
BEACONS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 176 of 416
Characteristics
Complementary
Material
Plastic
Product weight
0.07 kg
Environment

0730
RoHS EUR status

Compliant
Mon Oct
11 11:18:24 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
Product data sheet
XVDC02
fixing base - black
Main
Range of product
Harmony XVD
Accessory / separate
part designation
Fixing base
part type
Fixing base
part category
Mounting and fixing accessories
part destination
Beacons and indicator banks 70 mm
Height under base unit

100 mm
Colour
Black
page: 177 of 416
Characteristics
Complementary
Product weight
Mon Oct
11 11:16:56 EDT 2010
0.022 kg
REVISION: A
Product data sheet
XVDC04
screws for assembly unit 2 units without flash

discharge tube - XVD
Main
Range of product
Harmony XVD
part designation
Screw for assembling 2 signalling units on base unit
part type
Screw
part category
part destination
Bank without flash discharge tube unit
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 178 of 416
Characteristics
Complementary
Product weight
Mon Oct
11 11:19:58 EDT 2010
0.059 kg
REVISION: A
Product data sheet
XVDC12
screws for assembly unit 4 units with flash

discharge tube - XVD
Main
Range of product
Harmony XVD
part designation
Screw for assembling 4 signalling units on base unit
part type
Screw
part category
part destination
Bank with flash discharge tube unit
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 179 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
XVDC21
70 mm base unit + cover - black
Main
Harmony XVD Application
type
Base unit with cover
Component name
XVD
Indicator bank base

type
Standard
Material
Glass reinforced polyamide base unit

Polycarbonate cover unit
Range of product
Complementary
Fixing mode
Direct or tube fixing
Mounting diameter
70 mm
Product destination
Banks without flash discharge tube unit
Cable entry
Bottom entry
Assembly style
Customer assembly, up to 5 units
Terminals description ISO n1
(COM-1)PW
(COM-2)PW
(COM-3)PW
(COM-4)PW
(COM-5)PW
(GND)GROUND
Product weight
0.18 kg
Environment
CSA
GOST
UL
Standards
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
TC
-40...70 C
IP40 IEC 60529
Mon Oct
11 11:14:17 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 180 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
XVDC33
illuminated unit - steady light - green - 250 V

max
Range of product
type
Indicator bank
Beacon or indicator
bank unit type
Illuminated unit
Signalling type
Steady
Mounting diameter
70 mm
Component name
XVD
Material
Polycarbonate
Light source
Green bulb not included
Bulb type
Incandescent with BA 15d base

Protected LED
[Us] rated supply voltage
<= 250 V
Main
Complementary
Assembly style
Power dissipation in W
<= 10 W
Screw clamp terminals: <= 1 x 1.5 mm with cable end
Nominal voltage limit
0.85...1.1 Un conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
4 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1
CAD overall width
70 mm
CAD overall height
63 mm
CAD overall depth
70 mm
Product weight
0.115 kg
Environment
Pollution degree
CSA
GOST
UL
Standards
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
TC
-40...70 C
-25 - 50 C, with LED

-25 - 70 C, with incandescent
Class of protection against electric shock
Class I on support tube, with metal fixing plate conforming to IEC 60536
Class II on base unit conforming to IEC 60536
Class II on support tube, with plastic fixing plate conforming to IEC 60536
IP40 conforming to IEC 60529
Mon Oct
11 11:11:48 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 181 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
XVDC35
illuminated unit - steady light - orange - 250 V

max
Range of product
type
Indicator bank
Beacon or indicator
bank unit type
Illuminated unit
Signalling type
Steady
Mounting diameter
70 mm
Component name
XVD
Material
Polycarbonate
Light source
Orange bulb not included
Bulb type
Incandescent with BA 15d base

Protected LED
<= 250 V
Main
Complementary
Assembly style
Power dissipation in W
<= 10 W
Screw clamp terminals: <= 1 x 1.5 mm with cable end
Nominal voltage limit
0.85...1.1 Un conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
CAD overall width
70 mm
CAD overall height
63 mm
CAD overall depth
70 mm
Product weight
0.115 kg
Environment
Pollution degree
CSA
GOST
UL
Standards
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
TC
-40...70 C
-25 - 50 C, with LED

-25 - 70 C, with incandescent
Class I on support tube, with metal fixing plate conforming to IEC 60536
Class II on base unit conforming to IEC 60536
Class II on support tube, with plastic fixing plate conforming to IEC 60536
Mon Oct
11 11:20:53 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 182 of 416
RELAYS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 183 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
ABE7R16S111
sub-base - soldered electromechanical relays

ABE7 - 16 channels - relay 5 mm
Range of product
Advantys Telefast ABE7
type
Electromechanical output relay sub-base
Number of channels
16
Polarity distribution
Polarity distribution contact common per group of 8

channels
Contacts type and composition
1 NO (preactuator end)
Complementary
Terminal block type
Removable
24 V DC (PLC end)
Number of terminal per channel
Fixing mode
By clips on 35 mm symmetrical DIN rail

By screws on solid plate with fixing kit
Width
125 mm
Current per output common
12 A
Current per channel
2 A (preactuator end)
Minimum switching current
1 mA at >= 5 V
Drop-out voltage
2.4 V at 20 C (PLC end)
Switching frequency
<= 0.5 Hz
<= 10 Hz
Threshold tripping voltage
19.2 V at 40 C
Drop-out current
0.5 mA at 20 C
Power dissipation per channel in W
0.22 W (PLC end)
Maximum switching voltage
30 V DC conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

250 V AC 50/60 Hz conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
Number of channel per common
500000 cycles , maximum switching current: 600 mA at 230 V AC-12 (preactuator end)
500000 cycles , maximum switching current: 400 mA at 230 V AC-15 (preactuator end)
500000 cycles , maximum switching current: 600 mA at 24 V DC-12 (preactuator
end)
500000 cycles , maximum switching current: 200 mA at 24 V DC-13 10 ms (preactuator end)
Electrical reliability
0.00000001
Operating time
10 ms between coil energisation and NO closing

6 ms between coil de-energisation and NO opening
Contact bounce time
5 ms 1 NO
Operating rate in Hz
0.5 Hz at Ie
10 Hz no load
20000000 cycles
2.5 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1
2000 V
Installation category
II conforming to IEC 60664-1
Tightening torque
0.6 N.m (withflat 3.5 mm screwdriver)
Product weight
0.405 kg
Mon Oct
11 11:30:44 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 184 of 416
Main
Environment
Max immunity to microbreaks
5 ms
Dielectric strength
BV
CSA
GL
UL
IP2x conforming to IEC 60529
TC
Resistance to incandescent wire
750 C , extinction time: < 30 s conforming to IEC 60695-2-11
Shock resistance
15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
4 kV (contact) conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 level 3

8 kV (air) conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 level 3
10 V/m (26000000...1000000000 Hz) conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 level 3
2 kV conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 level 3
-5...60 C conforming to IEC 61131-2
-40...80 C conforming to IEC 61131-2
Pollution degree
2 conforming to IEC 60664-1
0841
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 185 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
RM4TG20
three-phase network control relay RM4-T range 200..500 V
Range of product
Zelio Control
type
Industrial measurement and control relays
Relay type
Control relay
Product specific application
For 3-phase supply
Relay name
RM4-T
Relay monitored parameters
Asymmetry
Phase failure detection
Phase sequence
Time delay
Without time delay
Measurement range
198...484 V
2 C/O
Poles description
3P
Complementary
220...440 V 50/60 Hz
Width
22.5 mm
Output contacts
2 C/O
Setting accuracy of time delay
10 P
Run up delay at power up
< 650 s
Measuring cycle
80 ms
Marking
CE : EMC 89/336/EEC
CE : LVD 73/23/EEC
Overvoltage category
III conforming to IEC 60664-1
500 V
Supply frequency
50/60 Hz +/- 5 %
Operating position
Any position without
Electrical connection
2 conductors cable 2.5 mm flexible without cable end conforming to IEC 60947-1
2 conductors cable 1.5 mm flexible with cable end conforming to IEC 60947-1
Tightening torque
0.6...1.1 N.m
30000000 cycles
[Ith] conventional free air thermal current
8A
[Ie] rated operational current
0.1 A at 70 C 250 V DC-13 conforming to VDE 0660

0.1 A at 70 C 250 V DC-13 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1/1991
0.3 A at 70 C 115 V DC-13 conforming to VDE 0660
0.3 A at 70 C 115 V DC-13 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1/1991
2 A at 70 C 24 V DC-13 conforming to VDE 0660
2 A at 70 C 24 V DC-13 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1/1991
3 A at 70 C 24 V AC-15 conforming to VDE 0660
3 A at 70 C 24 V AC-15 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1/1991
Switching capacity in mA
10 mA at 12 V
Switching voltage
250 V AC
440 V AC
Contacts material
90/10 silver nickel contacts
Number of cables
Output relay state
Tripped, fault present
9 mm pitches
2.5
Mon Oct
11 10:52:26 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 186 of 416
Main
Product weight
0.11 kg
Environment
Standards
EN/IEC 60255-6
CSA
GL
UL
-40...85 C
-20...65 C
Relative humidity
15...85 % 3K3 conforming to IEC 60721-3-3
0.35 ms (f = 10...55 Hz conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance
15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
IP20 (terminals) conforming to IEC 60529

IP50 (casing) conforming to IEC 60529
Pollution degree
3 conforming to IEC 60664-1
Dielectric test voltage
2.5 kV
Non-dissipating shock wave
4.8 kV
6 kV contact conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 level 3

8 kV air conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 level 3
Resistance to electromagnetic fields
10 V/m conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 level 3
Protection against electric shocks
Disturbance radiated/conducted
CISPR11 group 1- class A

CISPR22 - class A
0627
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 187 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
RXM4AB1BD
miniature relay plug-in - Zelio RXM - 4 CO 24V DC
Range of product
Zelio Relay
Series name
Miniature
Relay type
Plug-in relay
Relay name
RXM
Status LED
Without
Control circuit voltage
24 V DC
4 C/O
[Ithe] conventional enclosed thermal current
6 A 55 C
Contacts material
Silver alloy (Ag/Ni)
Load current
6 A 250 V AC
6 A 28 V DC
Utilisation coefficient
20 %
Complementary
250 V IEC
300 V UL
300 V CSA
4 kV IEC 61000-4-5
[Ie] rated operational current
3 A NC AC-1/DC-1 IEC
6 A NO AC-1/DC-1 IEC
8 A AC-1/DC-1 UL
Minimum switching current
10 mA
Maximum switching voltage
250 V AC/DC
Minimum switching voltage
17 V
Maximum switching capacity
168 W DC
1500 VA AC
Minimum switching capacity
170 mW
Operating rate
20 cyc/mn under load

300 cyc/mn no-load
10000000 cycles
100000 cycles resistive
Drop-out voltage threshold
>= 0.15 Uc AC
>= 0.1 Uc DC
Operating time
20 ms between coil de-energisation and making of the Off-delay contact AC/DC

20 ms between coil energisation and making of the On-delay contact AC/DC
Average resistance
650 Ohm DC 20 C +/- 10 %
Rated operational voltage limits
19.2...26.4 V DC
Protection category
RT I
Operating position
Any position
Product weight
0,037 kg
Mon Oct
11 10:19:19 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 188 of 416
Main
Environment
Dielectric strength
1500 V AC between contacts

1550 V AC between coil and contact
1550 V AC between poles
CSA
UL
Standards
CSA C22-2 No 14
EN/IEC 61810-1 (iss. 2)
UL 508
-40...85 C
-40...55 C
3 gn +/- 1 mm 10...150 Hz opening EN/IEC 60068-2-27

5 gn +/- 1 mm 10...150 Hz closing EN/IEC 60068-2-27
IP40 EN/IEC 60529
Shock resistance
15 gn closing EN/IEC 60068-2-27

15 gn opening EN/IEC 60068-2-27
0801
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 189 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
RXZE2M114M
socket for miniature relay - Zelio RXZ - with

mixed contacts - connectors
type
Sockets with mixed contacts
Relay RXM2....
Relay RXM4....
Product destination
Zelio Relay RXM
[Ith] conventional free

air thermal current
10 A
Connector
1 conductor cable 0,5...2,5 mm AWG20...AWG14

solid without cable end
1 conductor cable 0,25...2,5 mm AWG22...AWG14
flexible with cable end
2 conductors cable 0,25...1 mm AWG22...AWG17
flexible with cable end
2 conductors cable 0,5...1,5 mm AWG20...AWG16
solid without cable end
Tightening torque
1 N.m M3
Contact terminal arrangement
Mixed
Bus jumper
Without
CSA
UL
IP20 EN/IEC 60529
Sale per indivisible

quantity
10
Complementary
Product weight
0,056 kg
Environment
0801
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Mon Oct
11 10:17:11 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 190 of 416
Main
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 191 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 192 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 193 of 416
MISCELLANEOUS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 194 of 416
Characteristics
Mon Oct
11 11:13:06 EDT 2010
Range compatibility
Harmony XVB
Harmony XVD
Harmony XVP
part designation
Protected LED bulb
part type
LED bulb
part category
Lighting accessories
part destination
Beacon and indicator bank

24 V AC/DC
Signalling type
Steady
Signalling colour
Green

quantity
1
Complementary
Bulb base
BA 15d
Product weight
0.015 kg
Environment

0601
RoHS EUR status

Compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
Product data sheet
DL1BDB3
protected LED bulb with BA15d base - steady green - 24 V
Main
page: 195 of 416
Characteristics
Mon Oct
11 11:15:14 EDT 2010
Range compatibility
Harmony XVB
Harmony XVD
Harmony XVP
part designation
Protected LED bulb
part type
LED bulb
part category
Lighting accessories
part destination
Beacon and indicator bank

24 V AC/DC
Signalling type
Steady
Signalling colour
Yellow

quantity
1
Complementary
Bulb base
BA 15d
Product weight
0.015 kg
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
Product data sheet
DL1BDB8
protected LED bulb with BA15d base - steady yellow - 24 V
Main
page: 196 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
K1D004NX
body for stepping switch - 1 pole - 45 - 12 A for 22 mm
Range of product
Harmony K
type
Cam switch body
Component name
K1
[Ith] conventional free

air thermal current
12 A
Sub-assembly composition
Contact blocks + fixing plate
Cam switch function
Stepping switch
Off position
Without Off position
Poles description
1P
Switching positions
Right: 0 - 45 - 90 - 135
Product mounting
Front mounting
Fixing mode
22 mm hole
Bezel material
Metal
Main
Complementary
Number of steps
Switching angle
45
690 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1
[Ithe] conventional enclosed thermal current
10 A
Rated operational power in W
600 W AC-3 /230 V 1 phase conforming to IEC 947-3

1100 W AC-3 /230 V 3 phases conforming to IEC 947-3
1500 W AC-3 /400 V 1 phase conforming to IEC 947-3
1500 W AC-23A /230 V 3 phases conforming to IEC 947-3
10500 W AC-21 /500 - 660 V 3 phases conforming to IEC 947-3
[Ie] rated operational current AC
1 A at 500 V AC-15 conforming to IEC 947-5-1

1.8 A at 690 V AC-3 3 phases conforming to IEC 947-3
2.8 A at 690 V AC-23A 3 phases conforming to IEC 947-3
500000 cycles AC-3

500000 cycles AC-23
1000000 cycles AC-15
1000000 cycles AC-21
Operating rate
2.5 cyc/mn AC-3

2.5 cyc/mn AC-23
2.5 cyc/mn AC-21
8.333 cyc/mn AC-15
Short-circuit current
10000 A
Short circuit protection
16 A by cartridge fuse , type gG
4 kV in isolating function
Mon Oct
11 10:55:12 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 197 of 416
Contacts operation
Slow-break
Positive opening
With
Captive screw clamp terminals solid cable, 1 x 2.5 mm

Captive screw clamp terminals flexible cable, 2 x 1.5 mm
1000000 cycles
Product weight
0.188 kg
Environment
Standards
CENELEC EN 50013
EN/IEC 60947-3 for power circuit
EN/IEC 60947-5-1 for control circuit
CSA 240 V 1 hp 1 phase

CSA 240 V 3 hp 3 phases 2 -pole(s)
UL 240 V 0.33 hp 1 phase 2 -pole(s)
UL 240 V 1 hp 3 phases
TC
-25...55 C
-40...70 C
Shock resistance
30 gn conforming to IEC 68-2-27
5 gn , 10...150 Hz conforming to IEC 68-2-6
Class II conforming to IEC 536

Class II conforming to NF C 20-030
0910
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 198 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
KAXZ1M12
operating head with bezel 28.5 mm, metal black standard handle
Main
Harmony Series K
type
Cam switch operating head
Component name
KAX
Front mounting bodies 12 and 20 A by 22 mm

hole
Cam switch head type
With bezel 28.5 mm , metal
Type of operator
Black standard handle
Rotary handle padlocking
Without
Presentation of legend
With mat black legend

Range of product
Complementary
1000000 cycles
Product weight
0.04 kg
Environment
TC
-25...55 C
-40...70 C
Shock resistance
30 gn conforming to IEC 68-2-27
5 gn , 10...150 Hz conforming to IEC 68-2-6

IP65 conforming to NF C 20-010
0814
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Mon Oct
11 10:55:58 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 199 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
TSXCDP203
connecting cable - Modicon Premium - 2 m - for

sub-base ABE7H16R20
Range of product
Modicon Premium
part designation
Connecting cable
part type
Connecting cable
part category
Connection accessories
TSXCAY
TSXCCY1128
TSXCFY11
TSXCFY21
TSXCTY2A
TSXCTY2C
TSXCTY4A
part destination
Sub-base ABE7H16R20
Cable length
2m
Main
Complementary
1 connector HE10, 20 ways for module side

1 connector HE10, 20 ways for PLC side
Wire section
0.324 mm
AWG gauge
22
Product weight
0.28 kg
Environment
0726
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Mon Oct
11 11:23:14 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 200 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
TSXCDP301
preformed cable - 3 m - for Modicon Premium

PLC servodrive
Range of product
Modicon Premium
part designation
Preformed cable
part type
Connecting cable
part category
TSXCCY1128
TSXCFY11
TSXCFY21
TSXCTY2A
TSXCTY2C
TSXCTY4A
part destination
Modicon Premium PLC

servodrive
Cable length
3m
Main
Complementary
1 insulated connector HE10, 20 ways for module side

Free end with 4 colour-coded wires for PLC side
Wire section
0.324 mm
AWG gauge
22
Product weight
0.4 kg
Environment
0725
RoHS EUR status
Compliant
Mon Oct
11 11:29:38 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 201 of 416
Characteristics
Complementary
Product weight
Mon Oct
11 11:22:28 EDT 2010
0.01 kg
Environment

0736
RoHS EUR status

Compliant
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
Product data sheet
TSXPLP01
battery for internal RAM memory backup Modicon TSX Micro
Main
Range of product
Modicon Premium Automation platform
part designation
Battery
part type
Battery
part category
Separate parts
part destination
PLC
Product specific application

For internal RAM memory backup
Quantity per set

Set of 1
page: 202 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
XBTZ968
Magelis XBT - Uni-Telway/Modbus serial link 2.5 m
Main
Magelis XBT
part designation
Uni-Telway/Modbus serial link
part type
Connecting cable
part category
All Magelis XBTN/R except XBT N200/N400 and

XBT R400
part destination
Direct connection of XBT terminal to other Telemecanique product
Cable length
2.5 m
Range of product
Complementary
Range compatibility
Modicon Premium automation platform

Twido
1 male connector mini DIN 8 pins

1 male connector SUB-D 25
Communication port protocol
Modbus
Uni-Telway
Physical interface
RS485
Product weight
0.18 kg
Mon Oct
11 11:35:00 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 203 of 416
Product data sheet

Characteristics
XPSAC5121
module XPSAC - Emergency stop - 24 V AC

DC
Range of product
Preventa Safety automation
type
Preventa safety module
Safety module name
XPSAC
Safety module application
For emergency stop and switch monitoring
Safety use category
Category 3 maximum conforming to EN 954-1/ISO

13849-1
Function of module
Emergency stop
Switch monitoring
Type of start
Unmonitored
Captive screw clamp terminals (1 x 0.14...1 x 2.5

mm)flexible cable without cable end
mm)solid cable without cable end
mm)flexible cable with cable end, with bezel
mm)flexible cable with cable end, without bezel
mm)flexible cable without cable end
mm)solid cable without cable end
Captive screw clamp terminals (2 x 0.25...2 x 1
mm)flexible cable with cable end, without bezel
mm)flexible cable with cable end, with double bezel
Output type
Relay instantaneous opening 3 NO , volt-free
Number of additional
circuits
1 solid state output
24 V AC (- 20...10 %)
24 V DC (- 20...20 %)
Safety level
Can reach PL e/category 4 conforming to EN 954-1/

ISO 13849-1
Can reach SIL 3 conforming to EN/IEC 62061
Complementary
Supply frequency
50/60 Hz
Power consumption in W
<= 1.2 W DC
Power consumption in VA
<= 2.5 VA AC
24 V
Breaking capacity
C300 : 180 VA , AC-15 (holding) for relay output

C300 : 1800 VA , AC-15 (inrush) for relay output
Breaking capacity
1.5 A at 24 V time constant: 50 ms (DC-13) for relay output
Output thermal current
6 A per relay for relay output
[Ith] conventional free air thermal current
10.5 A
Associated fuse rating
4 A fuse type gG or gL for relay output conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1, DIN

VDE 0660 part 200
6 A fuse type fast blow for relay output conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1, DIN
VDE 0660 part 200
Minimum output current
10 mA for relay output
Minimum output voltage
16 V for relay output
Response time on input open
<= 100 ms
300 V (degree of pollution: 2) conforming to IEC 60647-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 part 1
4 kV overvoltage category III conforming to IEC 60647-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 part 1
Mon Oct
11 10:53:56 EDT 2010
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 204 of 416
Main
Local signalling
2 LEDs
Current consumption
40 mA at 24 V DC (on power supply)

90 mA at 24 V AC (on power supply)
Mounting support
Product weight
0.16 kg
Environment
Standards
EN 1088/ISO 14119
EN 60204-1
EN/IEC 60947-1 + A11
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/ISO 13850
CSA
TV
UL
IP20 conforming to EN/IEC 60529(terminals)

IP40 conforming to EN/IEC 60529(enclosure)
-10...55 C
-25...85 C
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 205 of 416
Characteristics
Product weight
Mon Oct
11 10:11:55 EDT 2010
part designation
Diode
part destination
Zelio Relay RPM
Zelio Relay RXM
part category
Protection accessories
RPZF1
RPZF2
RXZ sockets

quantity
20

6...250 V DC
Complementary
0,003 kg
Environment
RoHS EUR status

Compliant

0801
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
Product data sheet
RXM040W
protection module - diode - 6..250V DC - for

miniature relay socket RXZ
Main
page: 206 of 416
THERMAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
Accessories
c Switches on enclosure/rack lighting when the door is
opened.
c N/O contact, 10 A/500 V.
c Delivered with fixings.
reference
description
64680
door contact
c The partial flush mounting frame limits the depth of the
unit to the exterior of the enclosure while assuring ease

of installation.
c Material: sheet steel, textured paint finish, colour grey
RAL 7032.
reference
for unit reference
17975
17941
17976
17943
17977
17945
17978
17947 and 17957
reference
V*
W*
Door contact
Partial flush mounting
17975
320
635
646
346
80
90
17976
370
815
826
396
95
100
17977
420
915
926
446
95
100
17978
420
1015
1026
446
120
100
*V
* Maximum dimensions of frame.
*20
*W
26
c The partial flush-mounting frame limits the dimensions
of the unit to the exterior of the enclosure while

assuring ease of installation.
c Material: sheet steel, structured finish grey
RAL 7032.
partial flush mounting
frame ref.
for side group
17592
17600
Partial flush mounting frame for

ref. 17600
2/70
REVISION:
A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
When ordering
in the UK please add the prefix ENN
to the reference
number.
02_070_071.indd 70
X Y
26
Thermal Management Systems
page: 207 of 416
28/9/07 10:15:26
F) OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
&
G) TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 208 of 416
UNIT DISPLAY OPERATING MANUAL

MAGNELIS XBT R410
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 209 of 416
5.2. Unit display
Use of keys and Leds
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 196/201 /A
page: 210 of 416
Use of keys and Leds
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 197/201 /A
page: 211 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 198/201 /A
page: 212 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 199/201 /A
page: 213 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 200/201 /A
page: 214 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 201/201 /A
page: 215 of 416
Magelis XBT N/R/RT

Compact Display Units
User Manual
33003962.01
33003962
AHS-MRW00SEO.OM.109.06REVISION: A
06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 216 of 416
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 217 of 416
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Standards and General Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 3
3.1
Chapter 4
4.1
Chapter 5
5.1
Characteristics of the XBT Terminal Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Characteristics of the XBT Terminal Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics Applying to All XBT Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the Individual XBT Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polling Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
20
21
28
Operating Elements, LEDs and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Operating Elements, LEDs and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Keys on the Individual XBT Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
34
38
39
Insert Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Insert Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Labels XBT N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Labels XBT R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Labels XBT RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
48
50
52
Chapter 6
Inserting Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 7
Creating Individual Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter 8
8.1
8.2
Connecting XBT Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Grounding and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Information Concerning the Grounding of Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting XBT Terminals to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distinguishing XBT Terminals by Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by the PLC to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33003962 06/2008
67
67
69
70
71
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 218 of 416
8.3
8.4
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by an External Power Supply to a PC. . . . 74

Connecting XBT Terminals to a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Distinguishing XBT Terminals by Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by the PLC to a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by an External Power Supply to a PLC. . . 84
Connecting XBT N401 / R411 / RT511 Terminals to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Printer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Chapter 9
Overview of Applications and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
9.1
Overview of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Overview of XBT Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
XBT Terminals in HMI Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
HMI Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Functions of Keys, Touchscreen, LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Functions of Keys and Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Functions of LEDs on XBT N401 / XBT R411 / XBT RT511 Terminals. . . . . . . 101
9.2
9.3
Chapter 10
Operating Principles of XBT Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.1
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Automatic Selection of the Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Panel Structure of XBT Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Principle of Application Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Displaying Application Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Principle of Alarm Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Principle of System Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Displaying System Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Scrolling within Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
General Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Accessing Configuration Parameters via the System Panel SYSTEM . . . . . . . 126
Selecting the HMI Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Selecting the Date and Time Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Accessing the Product Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Accessing the Line Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Password-Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Accessing Password-Protected Panels, Fields, Functional Links . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.2
10.3
10.4
Chapter 11
Communication Between XBT Terminals and the Automation

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
11.1
Types of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Impulse Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Toggle Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Activating Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
11.2
4
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 219 of 416
11.3
11.4
11.5
Chapter 12
Activating Commands via Functional Links, Button Objects or Dynamic Function

Keys on the Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Activating Commands via Function Keys on the Display Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Entering / Modifying Values Alphanumeric Fields in Edition Mode . . . . . . . . . . 145
Accessing an Alphanumeric Edition Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Entering a Value in an Edition Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Confirming / Cancelling an Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Exit Edition on Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Edition Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Handling Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Viewing or Ignoring Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Printing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Principles of Printing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Printing Alarms as a Data Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Printing the Alarm Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Vijeo-Designer Lite Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Creating XBT Terminal Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Exchanging Data with the Automation System via the Dialog Table. . . . . . . . . 163
Appendices
Appendix A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Troubleshooting and Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Self-Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
170
172
174
Appendix B
Architectures of Automation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 220 of 416
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 221 of 416
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn
of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates
that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the
instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in injury or equipment damage.
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 222 of 416
Safety Information
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by

qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
2008 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 223 of 416
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This manual describes how to use the Magelis XBT N/R/RT device.
Validity Note
Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this
document. If you have suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found
errors in this publication, please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying, without express written permission of
Schneider Electric.
The data and illustrations found in this documentation are not binding. We reserve
the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product
development. The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric.
Related
Documents
Title of Documentation
Reference Number
Vijeo-Designer Lite
Online help
Modbus Master Protocol XBT N/R/RT
33003986
Modbus SlaveProtocol XBT N/R/RT
33003980
Uni-Telway Protocol XBT N/R/RT
33003974
Siemens PPI Protocol XBT N/R/RT
33003992
AB DF1 Protocol XBT N/R/RT
33003998
AB DH485 Protocol XBT N/R/RT
33004016
Mitsubishi FX Protocol XBT N/R/RT
33004004
SYSMAC-WAY Protocol XBT N/R/RT
33004010
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 224 of 416
About the Book
You can download these technical publications and other technical information from
our website at www.telemecanique.com.
Product Related
Warnings
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when
installing and using this product. For reasons of safety and to ensure compliance
with documented system data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to
components.
When controllers are used for applications with technical safety requirements,
please follow the relevant instructions.
User Comments
We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at
techpub@schneider-electric.com
10
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 225 of 416
Document Conventions
1
General information
Pictograms
The meaning of the pictograms used in this document is explained below.

Pictogram
Description
Indicates information concerning the communication LED.
Indicates information concerning LEDs in general.
Represents a button on the Vijeo-Designer Lite program toolbar.
Represents a button on the XBT terminal.
11
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 226 of 416
Document Conventions
12
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 227 of 416
Overview
2
Standards and General Safety Precautions
List of Standards
XBT terminals have been developed to conform to the following standards:

z
z
z
UL 508 for Industrial Control Equipment

UL 1604 Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and Class II Division 2 and
Class III Hazardous Locations
CAN/CSA-C22.2, No. 14, No. 213, and No. 60950 Industrial Control Equipment
Miscellaneous Apparatus - For Hazardous Locations.
13
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 228 of 416
Overview
General Safety
Precautions
DANGER
EXPLOSION
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Compatibility: Power and external device wiring must be in accordance with

Class I, Division 2 wiring methods - Article 501- 4(b) of the National Electrical
Code, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous Locations or Non-Hazardous
Locations, NFPA 70 or as specified in section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical
Code for installations within Canada and in accordance with the authority
having jurisdiction.
Do not perform substitution of components that may impair compliance to Class
I, Division 2.
Confirm that the location is not subject to any risk of explosion before
connecting or disconnecting equipment, replacing or wiring modules.
Confirm that the power supply has been turned OFF before disconnecting,
replacing or wiring modules.
Before turning ON, sweep front panel with a damp cloth to discharge
electrostatics.
Do not use apparatus that has been damaged.
When used in hazardous locations (Class I Div.2, UL and CSA) and if suitable
for the application (see product label) do not connect or disconnect equipment
unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Due to the risk that a value entered on the terminal may not reach the equipment
(for example, if a communication break occurs due to huge bandwidth
consumption, the value may not be sent to the PLC) you are not allowed to use
the terminal to pilot safety critical processes, for example emergency stop or crane
load manipulation where human beings may get injured.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
14
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 229 of 416
Overview
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
z
z
Read and follow all user instructions and documentation.

Follow all local and national product safety codes and standards.

equipment damage.
15
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 230 of 416
Overview
16
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 231 of 416
Characteristics of the XBT

Terminal Range
At a Glance
Overview
This chapter presents the different types of XBT terminals with their individual
characteristics.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:

Section
3.1
Topic
Page
Characteristics of the XBT Terminal Range
19
17
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 232 of 416
18
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 233 of 416
3.1
At a Glance
Overview
This section lists the characteristics of the individual versions of the XBT terminal
range.
What's in this
Section?
This section contains the following topics:

Topic
Page
Characteristics Applying to All XBT Terminals
20
Characteristics of the Individual XBT Terminals
21
Polling Times
28
19
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 234 of 416
Characteristics Applying to All XBT Terminals

Overview
XBT Type
XBT N200
XBT N400 / XBT R400 / XBT N410 / XBT N401 /

XBT RT500 /
XBT NU400 / XBT R410
XBT RT511
/ XBT R411
Environment
Compliance with standards
IEC 61131-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-27, UL 508, CSA C22-2 no. 14,
no 213, and no. 60950
Product certification
CE, UL, CSA, Class 1 Div 2 T5 (UL and CSA)
Temperature
Operation
0...+55C (32F...131F)
Storage
-20...+60C (-4F...140F)
Humidity (without condensation)
0...85%
Protection
IP 65 - (IEC 60529 - NF C 20010)

XBT RT: UL Type 4, indoor use only. Do not store or operate the LCD display
in areas receiving direct sunlight since the suns UV rays may cause the LCD
displays quality to deteriorate.
XBT N/R: UL Type 4, 4X outdoor use (only for support 1.5 mm / 0.059 in.)
Front panel
Rear panel
ESD withstand
IP 20 (IEC 60529)
IEC 61000 - 4 - 2, level 3
Electromagnetic interference
IEC 61000 - 4 - 3, 10 V/m
Electrical interference
IEC 61000 - 4 - 4, level 3
Impact
IEC 60068 - 2 - 27; 1/2 sinusoidal pulse for 11 ms, 15 g on 3 axes
Vibration
IEC 60068 - 2 - 6 and marine certifications

3.5 mm 2 Hz...8.45 Hz
1 g 8.75 Hz...150 Hz
XBT RT does not have marine certifications
Mounting and fixing
Flush-mounted, fixed by 2 (for XBT N) or 4 (for XBT R and XBT RT) spring
clips supplied pressure-mounted for panels 1.5...6 mm (0.06...0.23 in.) thick
Material
Polyester
display unit
protection
Front frame
Polycarbonate/polybutylene terephthalate alloy
Keypad
UV autotex polyester
20
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 235 of 416
Characteristics of the Individual XBT Terminals

Overview
The following tables list the characteristics of the individual XBT terminal versions.
XBT Type
XBT N200
XBT N400 / XBT R400 /

XBT RT500
XBT N410 / XBT N401 /

XBT NU400 / XBT R410 /
XBT R411/ XBT RT511
Power supply
Voltage
5 VDC supplied by the PLC. For the specific

cables see Connecting XBT Terminals, p. 65.
24 VDC (200 mA max)
Voltage limits
5 V 5% DC, 1 W maximum
18...30 VDC, 5 W maximum
Ripple factor
5% maximum
Note: For products with a resettable fuse (XBT N410 / XBT N401 / XBT NU400 /
XBT R410 / XBT R411 / XBT RT511), switch off the power supply for 5 seconds
before resetting the fuse.
CAUTION
OVERVOLTAGE DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT
Make sure to connect the following terminals only to a source providing 5 VDC.
z XBT N200
z XBT N400
z XBT R400
z XBT RT500
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Note: XBT RT500 terminals are protected against accidental connection to higher
voltages (up to 30 V) but the other terminal types are not and will be damaged.
21
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 236 of 416
XBT Type
XBT N200
XBT N400 / XBT N410 / XBT RT500 /

XBT N401 / XBT NU400 XBT RT511
/ XBT R400 / XBT R410
/ XBT R411
Operating characteristics
Display unit
Type
Backlit LCD
Capacity
2 x 20 characters
4 x 20 characters
10 x 33 characters
XBT Type
XBT N200 / XBT N400 / XBT N410 /

XBT NU400 / XBT R400 / XBT R410 /
XBT RT500
XBT N401
XBT RT511
XBT R411
Signaling
No LEDs
6 LEDs
13 LEDs
14 LEDs
XBT Type
XBT N200 / XBT N400 / XBT N410 /

XBT NU400 / XBT R400 / XBT R410 /
XBT RT500 / XBT N401 / XBT R411
XBT RT511
Buzzer
No buzzer
Buzzer for alarm signaling and

feedback on keypad/touchpad
activity
XBT Type
XBT N200 / XBT N400
XBT N401/ XBT N410 /

XBT R410 / XBT R411 /
XBT RT500 / XBT RT511
Dialog application No. of panels
128
200
Transmission medium
(asynchronous serial link)
RS232C / RS485
22
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 237 of 416
XBT Type
XBT NU400
XBT N200 / XBT N400 /

XBT R400
XBT N401 / XBT N410 /

XBT R410 / XBT R411 /
XBT RT500 /
XBT RT511
Supported protocols
Modbus master
Modbus master, UniTelway
Modbus master and

slave(*), Uni-Telway,
Siemens PPI, AB DF1,
AB DH485,
Mitsubishi FX,
SYSMAC-WAY
Real-time clock
Access to the PLC real-time clock
(*) Modbus slave is not supported by the XBT RT500.
XBT Type
Connection
Power supply
XBT N200 / XBT N400 / XBT R400 /

XBT RT500
XBT N401 / XBT N410 /

XBT R411 / XBT RT511
Via the PLC link cable or via an external

5 V power supply by using the
XBT ZRTPW accessory
Removable terminal block

3 screw terminals (pitch 5.08)
Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2
(0.0023 in2)
XBT Type
Connection
XBT N200 / XBT N400 / XBT R400 /

XBT RT500 / XBT RT511
Serial link
XBT Type
Connection
Printer link
XBT N401 / XBT N410 /

XBT R411
RJ45 female connector (RS232C/RS485) 25-pin female SubD connector

(RS232C / RS485)
XBT N200 / XBT N400 / XBT N410 /

XBT NU400 / XBT R400 / XBT R410 /
XBT RT500
XBT N401 / XBT R411 /

XBT RT511
No printer link
MiniDin (full RS232C, including

modem signals)
23
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 238 of 416
Display Units
Alphanumeric
Display Unit
XBT N200
Matrix Display Unit
Matrix Display Unit
Matrix Display Unit
XBT N400
XBT NU400
XBT N401
Type
Backlit LCD
Backlit LCD 122 x 32 pixels
Color
Green
Capacity
2 lines of 20
characters
1...4 lines of 5...20 characters
Active display unit

area (width x
height)
74 x 12 mm (2.91 x
0.47 in.)
72 x 20 mm (2.83 x 0.79 in.)
Size of characters
(width x height)
3.2 x 5.5 mm (0.13 x

0.22 in.
2.9 x 4.3 to 11.8 x 17.4 mm (0.11 x 0.17 to 0.46 x 0.69 in.)
Keypad
8 keys, 4 of them can be re-labeled
Signaling
No LEDs
Display
Green/Orange/Red
6 LEDs including 4 for

the 4 central keys
Functions
Number of panels
(maximum)
128 application
panels
200 application panels

256 alarm panels
Variables per panel
40
Vertical panel
scrolling
no
yes
Number of lines per

panel
25
Representation of
variables
Alphanumeric
Fonts
Latin + Katakana
Languages
Number of languages only limited by the size of the memory
Latin + Cyrillic + Katakana + Greek + Simplified Chinese
Communication
Serial link
RS232 C, RS485
24
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 239 of 416
Display Units
Alphanumeric
Display Unit
XBT N200
Matrix Display Unit
Matrix Display Unit
Matrix Display Unit
XBT N400
XBT NU400
XBT N401
Modbus master
Modbus master and

slave, Uni-Telway,
Siemens PPI,
AB DF1, AB DH485,
Mitsubishi FX,
SYSMAC-WAY
Protocols
Modbus master, Uni-Telway
Programming
software
Vijeo-Designer Lite (using Windows XP or Vista)
Matrix Display Units XBT N410
XBT R400
XBT R410
XBT R411
Display
Type
Color
Green
Capacity
Active display unit

area (width x
height)
72 x 20 mm (2.83 x 0.79 in.)
Size of characters
(width x height)
2.9 x 4.3 to 11.8 x 17.4 mm (0.11 x 0.17 to 0.46 x 0.69 in.)
Keypad
8 keys, 4 of which can 20 keys, 12 of which can be re-labeled

be re-labeled
Signaling
No LEDs
Green/Orange/Red
16 LEDs including 14
for the central keys
Functions
Number of panels
(maximum)

256 alarm panels
25
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 240 of 416
Matrix Display Units XBT N410
XBT R400
XBT R410
Variables per panel
40
Vertical panel
scrolling
yes
Number of lines per

panel
25
Representation of
variables
Alphanumeric
Fonts
Languages
XBT R411
Communication
Serial link
RS232 C, RS485
Protocols
Modbus master and

slave, Uni-Telway,
Siemens PPI,
AB DF1, AB DH485,
Mitsubishi FX,
SYSMAC-WAY
Programming
software
Modbus master, Uni- Modbus master and slave, Uni-Telway,

Telway
Siemens PPI, AB DF1, AB DH485,
Mitsubishi FX, SYSMAC-WAY
Matrix Display Units XBT RT500
XBT RT511
Display
Type
Color
Green
Capacity
Green/Orange/Red
26
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 241 of 416
Matrix Display Units XBT RT500
XBT RT511
Active display unit

89.9 x 40 mm (3.54 x 1.57 in.)
area (width x height)
Size of characters
(width x height)
2.7 x 4 to 16 x 16 mm (0.11 x 0.16 to 0.43 x 0.94 in.)
Keypad
12 keys: in control and input variant 4 of them can be re-labeled, in touch variant 10 of them
can be re-labeled
Signaling
No LEDs
13 LEDs including 10 for the central keys
Functions
Number of panels
(maximum)

256 alarm panels
Variables per panel
40
Vertical panel
scrolling
no
Number of lines per

panel
10
Representation of
variables
Alphanumeric semi-graphical (bargraph, trends, lights and buttons)
Fonts
Languages
Communication
Serial link
RS232 C, RS485
Protocols
Modbus master , Uni-Telway, Siemens PPI,

AB DF1, AB DH485, Mitsubishi FX,
SYSMAC-WAY
Programming
software
Modbus master and slave, Uni-Telway,

Siemens PPI, AB DF1, AB DH485,
Mitsubishi FX, SYSMAC-WAY
27
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 242 of 416
Polling Times
Overview
The polling times for non-connected equipment differ between XBT N/R/RT
terminals and XBT NU400 terminals. The following sections describe general polling
times of XBT N/R/RT terminals and specific polling times of XBT NU400 terminals.
General Polling
Time for NonConnected
Equipment
The XBT N/R/RT terminal polls the missing equipment (usually a PLC) every 5
seconds. All the configured PLCs in an application should be connected. A missing
equipment is therefore considered to be a temporary problem, i.e. the PLC or XBT
is temporarily disconnected, and communication will resume as soon as the
connection is re-established. In this arrangement, degraded communication
performance is considered acceptable.
Temporary
disconnection
Modbus
XBTN401
Master
PLC1
Slave@1
PLC2
Slave@2
PLC3
Slave@3
PLC4
Slave@4
28
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 243 of 416
Polling Time of
XBT NU400
Terminals
The XBT NU400 polls the missing equipment, i.e. a starter, every 5 minutes. This
time interval has been selected due to performance and system validation reasons.
The XBT NU400 is delivered with a unique pre-loaded application for
communication with up to 8 TESYS model U starters. However, in the final system
configuration, less than 8 starters may be used permanently as a normal installation.
In this case, polling the missing starter(s) in too short time intervals will drastically
decrease the communication with the connected starters. This, in turn, may lead to
increased response times and cause critical application issues. In some cases, time
between operator action and starter acknowledgement can be longer than 20
seconds.
This is why the polling time of non-connected equipment has been set to this much
longer period of 5 minutes.
The pre-loaded application in XBTNU400 in version 2.2 and later provide a page for
manually resetting the communication. During this manual restart of the terminal the
reconnected devices will be detected.
Modbus
XBTNU400
Master
Starter 1
Slave @1
Starter 2
Slave @2
Starter 3
Slave @3
Starter 7
Slave @7
Starters not present

in installation
Starter 4 Starter 5 Starter 6
Slave @4 Slave @5 Slave @6
Starter 8
Slave @8
29
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 244 of 416
30
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 245 of 416
Operating Elements, LEDs and

Connectors
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes all operating elements, LEDs and connectors provided on the
front and rear panels of the XBT N/R/RT terminals.
What's in this
Chapter?

Section
4.1
Topic
Page
Operating Elements, LEDs and Connectors
33
31
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 246 of 416
32
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 247 of 416
4.1
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes all operating elements, LEDs and connectors provided on the
front and rear panels of the XBT N/R/RT terminals.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Front Panels
34
Rear Panels
38
Overview of Keys on the Individual XBT Terminals
39
33
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 248 of 416
Front Panels
Overview
The following sections list the front panels of the individual XBT terminal versions
with the operating and control elements.
XBT N Terminals
On their front panels the XBT N terminals provide the following operating and
control elements:
XBT N200
XBT N401
5
2
3
4
XBT N
7
6
34
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 249 of 416
No.
Description
Backlit LCD display
Communication LED (XBT N401)
Alarm LED (XBT N401)
LEDs that can be controlled by the PLC (XBT N401)
Service keys for functional link
Service keys
Keys for function or numeric input (according to software configuration)
35
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 250 of 416
XBT R Terminals
On their front panels the XBT R terminals provide the following operating and control
elements:
XBT R4
1
XBT R411
XBT R4
5
3
86
3
7
No.
1
Description
Backlit LCD display
Communication LED (XBT R411)
Alarm LED (XBT R411)
LEDs that can be controlled by the PLC (XBT R411)
Service keys for functional link
Service keys
Control keys for function or digital input (according to the context)
36
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 251 of 416
XBT RT
Terminals
On their front panels the XBT RT terminals provide the following operating and
control elements:
XBT RT5
XBT RT511
8
6
2
No.
1
Description
Backlit LCD display
Service keys
Keys for control or service (according to software configuration)
Configurable touchscreen
Communication LED (XBT RT511)
Alarm LED (XBT RT511)
LEDs that can be controlled by the PLC (XBT RT511)
Touch LED (XBT RT511)
37
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 252 of 416
Rear Panels
Overview
The following section shows the different rear panels of the individual XBT terminal
versions with their connectors.
Rear Panel
On their rear panels the XBT terminals provide the following connectors
XBT N200 / XBT N400 / XBT R400
XBT N410 / XBT NU400 / XBT R410
XBT N401 / XBT R411
XBT RT500
13
35
XBT RT511
4
5
No.
1
Description
RJ45: serial link + PLC power supply
RJ45 serial link
SubD25 serial link
3-wire terminal for 24 VDC power supply
MiniDIN connector for printer
38
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 253 of 416
Overview of Keys on the Individual XBT Terminals

Overview
The various types of XBT terminals provide different front panels including different
keys for executing functions or entering values . The following paragraphs provide
an overview of the keys provided on the individual XBT terminals.
WARNING
The control key insert label must match the configured function of the key.
equipment damage.
Types of Keys
The front panels of the terminals include 2 types of keys:

z
Service keys
Service keys provide different actions to the operator, like scrolling within the
display of the terminal, selecting the panel to be displayed as well as selecting
objects or entering values in the panel shown on the terminal display.
Function keys
Function keys are individually configured by the HMI designer who created the
HMI application of the XBT terminal using the Vijeo-Designer Lite software. 2
different types of function keys are available:
z static function keys: Static function keys are assigned a constant function (like
selecting the panel to be displayed or executing commands) for the entire HMI
application.
z dynamic function keys: Dynamic function keys can be assigned different
functions (like selecting the panel to be displayed, setting/resetting bits or
executing commands) by the HMI designer, depending on the actually
displayed panel.
XBT N and XBT RT terminals can be configured for different variants (control and
input variant as well as touch variant only for XBT RT) with the function keys
providing different functions in each variant. XBT R terminals, on the other hand,
only provide one variant.
It is also possible that function keys have different functions in one variant,
depending on whether you are only viewing the panels (normal mode) or you are
entering values (edition mode). Function keys with 2 functions are referred to as
dual labelled keys in this manual.
39
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 254 of 416
Overview of Keys
on the Terminals
The individual terminals provide the following keys:

XBT N
XBT R
4 customizable keys which

12 customizable function
can be configured as function keys
keys (control variant) or as
service keys (input variant)
2 non-configurable service
keys
z 2 non-configurable service
2 configurable service keys

for functional link keys
2 configurable service keys

for functional link keys
XBT RT
10 customizable keys which
can be configured as 10
function keys (touch variant)
or as 4 function and 6 service
keys (control or input
variants)
2 non-configurable service
keys
keys
z 4 non-configurable service
keys
configurable touchscreen
40
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 255 of 416
Keys on XBT N
Terminals
XBT N terminals are customized for 2 different variants:

z
z
control variant
input variant
In these 2 different variants the terminals provide the following keys on their front
panels:
Control variant
Input variant
2a
2b
2b
DEL
No.
1
Element
Description
Static function
keys
z access to a panel
MOD
z impulse command
z toggle command
2a
2b
Left/right arrows in Navigation link keys:

z change panel in a menu
control variant
(functional link
z display current alarms
keys)
Command link keys:

z impulse command
z toggle command
z variable write operation
Command link keys:
Left/right arrows in
input variant
(functional link
keys)
Navigation link keys:

z change digit in a variable field
during edition
ESC
Cancel an entry or an action
DEL
Clear the selected digit or field
Up/down arrows
Go up, go down in a panel

(XBT N40 and NU400)
Increment/decrement the selected
digit
Select a value in a selection list

Increment/decrement the value
of a variable field
MOD
Select a field
Go to the next field
ENTER
Confirm a selection or an entry
Acknowledge an alarm
z impulse command
z toggle command
Return to the previous panel
41
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 256 of 416
Keys on XBT R
Terminals
2
4
3
5
No.
Element
Description
Dual labelled
keys (function/
numeric)
z access to a panel
Left/right
arrows
(functional link
keys)

during edition
Command link keys:

z impulse command
z toggle command
ESC
DEL
Up/down
arrows
Go up, go down within a panel;

Increment/decrement the
selected digit
z impulse command
z toggle command
z modification of a value
Select a value in a selection list;

Increment/decrement the value of
a variable field
MOD
Select a field
ENTER
Confirm a selection or an entry
42
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 257 of 416
Keys on XBT RT
Terminals
Control variant
Input variant
7b
7a
1
Touch variant
9
8
7a
43
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 258 of 416
No.
Element
Description
Left/right
arrows
(functional link
keys)

z navigation: change panel in a
menu
during edition
Up/down
arrows
Select a functional link in a panel Select a value in a selection list

Increment/decrement the
Increment/decrement the value of
selected digit
a variable field
ESC
DEL
MOD
Select a field
ENTER
Confirm a selection or an
entered value
7a
Control or
touch variant
Static function keys:

z access a panel
z impulse command
z toggle command
7b
Input variant
Dynamic function keys

(functionality is paneldependent):
z access a panel
z set / reset bit
z impulse command
z toggle command
Touchscreen
Activity depending on the

selected variant:
z enabled in touch variant
z disabled in control and input
variant
Dual labelled
keys
The active function of keys F1 to

F4 is determined by the selected
terminal mode:
z in edition mode: arrow keys
acting like up/down/left/right
arrows
z in normal mode: static
function keys (see
description 7)
44
Command link keys:

z impulse command
z toggle command
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 259 of 416
Insert Labels
5
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes the different insert labels provided for the different XBT types
and gives instructions on how to properly install them.
What's in this
Chapter?

Section
5.1
Topic
Page
Insert Labels
47
45
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 260 of 416
Insert Labels
46
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 261 of 416
Insert Labels
5.1
Insert Labels
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes the different insert labels provided for the different XBT types.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Insert Labels XBT N
48
Insert Labels XBT R
50
Insert Labels XBT RT
52
47
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 262 of 416
Insert Labels
Insert Labels XBT N

Overview
XBT N terminals are delivered with an insert label sheet providing the following label
types to assign different texts or symbols to the keys:
z
z
z
service key labels

function key labels
blank labels
All labels are pre-cut and just have to be pressed out of the label sheet.
The ready-to-use service key and function key labels can directly be inserted into
the XBT N terminal as described in section Inserting Insert Labels, p. 55.
To print your own text or symbols on the blank labels, use the Vijeo-Designer Lite
configuration software.
New label sheets can be ordered at Schneider with the following part numbers:
XBT Terminal
Label Sheet Part Number
XBT N200 / XBT N400 / XBT NU400 / XBT N410
XBLYN00
XBT N401
XBLYN01
WARNING
Make sure that the text/symbols on your insert label always correspond to what is
configured for your XBT terminal in the Vijeo-Designer Lite configuration software.
Otherwise the keys of your terminal will not initiate the actions indicated on them.
equipment damage.
Service Key
Labels for XBT N
Terminals
If you have configured your XBT N terminal for input variant in the Vijeo-Designer
Lite configuration software, insert the following service key label into your XBT N
terminal.
Service key label XBT N
Service key label XBT N401 (with LEDs)
48
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 263 of 416
Insert Labels
Function Key
Labels for XBT N
Terminals
If you have configured your XBT N terminal for control variant in the Vijeo-Designer
Lite configuration software, insert the following function key label into your XBT N
terminal.
Function key label XBT N
Function key label XBT N401 (with LEDs)
Blank Labels for

XBT N Terminals
The insert label sheet includes blank labels providing you the possibility to create
labels with your own texts or symbols.
Blank label XBT N
Blank label XBT N401 (with LEDs)
For a detailed description on how to print your own labels see Creating Individual
Labels, p. 61
49
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 264 of 416
Insert Labels
Insert Labels XBT R

Overview
XBT R terminals are delivered with an insert label sheet providing the following label
types to assign different texts or symbols to the keys:
z
z
function key labels

blank labels
The ready-to-use function key labels can directly be inserted into the XBT R terminal
as described in section Inserting Insert Labels, p. 55.
XBT Terminal
XBT R400 / XBT R410
XBLYR00
XBT R411
XBLYR01
WARNING
equipment damage.
Function Key
Labels for XBT R
Terminals
The following function key label is provided on the label sheet of XBT R terminals.
Function key label XBT R
Function key label XBT R411 (with LEDs)
50
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 265 of 416
Insert Labels
Blank Labels for

XBT R Terminals
Blank label XBT R
Blank label XBT R411 (with LEDs)
Labels, p. 61
51
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 266 of 416
Insert Labels
Insert Labels XBT RT

Overview
XBT RT terminals are delivered with 2 insert label sheets providing the following
label types to assign different texts or symbols to the keys:
z
z
z
z
service key labels

function key labels
touch key labels
blank labels
The ready-to-use service key, function key and touch key labels can directly be
inserted into the XBT RT terminal as described in section Inserting Insert Labels,
p. 55.
XBT Terminal
XBT RT500
XBLYRT00
XBT RT511
XBLYRT01
WARNING
equipment damage.
52
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 267 of 416
Insert Labels
Service Key
Labels for
XBT RT
Terminals
If you have configured your XBT RT terminal for input variant in the Vijeo-Designer
Lite configuration software, insert the following service key label into your XBT RT
terminal.
Service key label XBT RT
XBT RT500
XBT RT511
Function Key
Labels for
XBT RT
Terminals
If you have configured your XBT RT terminal for control variant in the Vijeo-Designer
Lite configuration software, insert the following function key label into your XBT RT
terminal.
Function key label XBT RT
XBT RT500
XBT RT511
Touch Key
Labels for
XBT RT
Terminals
If you have configured your XBT RT terminal for touch variant in the Vijeo-Designer
Lite configuration software, insert the following touch key label into your XBT RT
terminal.
Touch key label XBT RT
XBT RT500
XBT RT511
53
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 268 of 416
Insert Labels
Blank Labels for

XBT RT
Terminals
Service blank label XBT RT
XBT RT500
XBT RT511
Touch blank label XBT RT
XBT RT500
XBT RT511
Labels, p. 61
54
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 269 of 416
Inserting Labels
6
Inserting Insert Labels
Overview
In order to be sure that each key of the XBT terminals executes the requested
function it is of vital importance that you correctly insert the insert label into the
device. The following paragraphs describe the procedures of inserting insert labels
into XBT N, XBT R and XBT RT terminals.
WARNING
equipment damage.
55
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 270 of 416
Inserting Labels
Graphical
Representation
of Correctly
Inserting Labels
into XBT N
Terminals
The graphic below shows how to correctly insert an insert label into an XBT N
terminal:
Inserting Labels
into XBT N
Terminals
For inserting insert labels into XBT N terminals proceed as follows:

Step
Action
Press the pre-cut insert label of your choice out of the insert label sheet.
Take your XBT N terminal and turn it around so that you can see its rear panel. On
the left-hand side of the rear panel, located directly behind the overlapping display,
you will find the opening for the insert label.
Insert the insert label cautiously into this opening (as shown in steps 1 and 2 of the
above figure) until the 4 key symbols / texts have disappeared and the only sign that
can still be seen of the insert label is the double arrow.
Turn your XBT N terminal around and check at its front side that all 4 symbols / texts
are clearly visible at the keys. If the texts / symbols are not clearly visible, insert the
insert label a bit further into the opening. A graphical example of a not correctly
inserted insert label is provided for XBT R / RT terminals below in this chapter.
If the texts / symbols are clearly visible on the front of the terminal, take the part (with
the double arrow sign) of the insert label that is still visible on the rear of the terminal
and slide this flap into the slit indicated in step 3 of the above figure. The flap should
now be flush with the rear of the terminal (see step 4 of the above figure).
If the insert label has not correctly been inserted into the XBT terminal, the flap of
the insert label will be too long to fit into this slit. A graphical example of a not
correctly inserted insert label is provided for XBT R / RT terminals below in this
chapter.
56
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 271 of 416
Inserting Labels
Graphical
Representation
of Correctly
Inserting Labels
into XBT R /
XBT RT
Terminals
The graphic below shows how to correctly insert an insert label into an XBT R /
XBT RT terminal:
57
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 272 of 416
Inserting Labels
Inserting Labels
into XBT R /
XBT RT
Terminals
For inserting insert labels into XBT R / XBT RT terminals proceed as follows:
Step
Action
Press the pre-cut insert label of your choice out of the insert label sheet.
Take your XBT R / XBT RT terminal and turn it around so that you can see its
rear panel. On the right-hand side of the rear panel, located directly behind the
overlapping display, you will find the opening for the insert label.
Insert the insert label cautiously into this opening (as shown in steps 1 and 2 of
the above figure) until the key symbols / texts on the wide part of the insert labels
have disappeared and the wide part of the insert label is flush with the opening.
There will be merely the small flap of the insert label with the double arrow being
visible outside the terminal.
Turn your XBT R / XBT RT terminal around and check at its front side that all
symbols / texts are clearly visible at the keys. If the texts / symbols are not clearly
visible, insert the insert label a bit further into the opening.
Front of XBT RT terminal with insert label not correctly inserted
58
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 273 of 416
Inserting Labels
Step
5
Action
If the texts / symbols are clearly visible on the front of the terminal, take the small
part (with the double arrow sign) of the insert label that is still visible on the rear
of the terminal and slide this flap into the slit indicated in step 3 of the above
figure. The flap should now be flush with the rear of the terminal (see step 4 of
the above figure).
If the insert label has not correctly been inserted into the XBT terminal, the flap
of the insert label will be too long to fit into this slit.
Rear of XBT terminal with insert label not correctly inserted
59
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 274 of 416
Inserting Labels
60
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 275 of 416
Creating Individual Labels
7
Overview
For describing the procedure of creating and printing individual texts or symbols on
the blank labels, blank labels of XBT R / RT terminals are used as an example in this
section. The process of printing labels for XBT N terminals is identical, with the
difference that they provide only 1 line of text / symbols.
61
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 276 of 416
Creating
Individual Labels
To create insert labels with your own texts or symbols, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
Open the Static Function Keys dialog box in the Vijeo-Designer Lite
configuration software for your XBT terminal type.
Click the Print Label button.

Result: A special Microsoft Word template opens.
Microsoft Word template for XBT RT
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Modify the Word template to create your own key labels.
62
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 277 of 416
Step
4
Action
Print the modified Word document first on a blank paper to create a reference
sheet.
Printout of the modified Word template
Left
On
Off
Right
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
Text
63
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 278 of 416
Step
5
Action
Position the insert label sheet on the reference printout in a way that the keys the
new texts / symbols should be printed on are exactly on top of the new texts /
symbols on the reference printout.
Positioning insert label sheet on the reference printout
Left
On
Off
Right
Fix the insert label sheet on the reference printout using adhesive tape and insert
them in your printer.
Activate the print command to print on the insert label sheet.
After the texts / symbols have been printed on your insert label sheet, remove
the insert label sheet from the reference printout, press the insert label out of the
sheet and insert it in your terminal as described in section Inserting Insert Labels,
p. 55.
64
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 279 of 416
Connecting XBT Terminals
8
At a Glance
Overview
XBT terminals can be connected to different equipment to perform the following

tasks:
z
z
z
For exchanging software configuration data with Vijeo-Designer Lite, connect the
XBT terminal with a PC where Vijeo-Designer Lite is running.
For controlling an automation system, connect the XBT terminal with a PLC.
For printing alarms as a data stream, alarm log files or a list of current alarms,
connect the XBT terminal with a printer.
The following sections describe how to connect your XBT terminal to the different
equipment and provides safety information concerning the cabling.
What's in this
Chapter?

Section
Topic
Page
8.1
Grounding and Safety
67
8.2
Connecting XBT Terminals to a PC
69
8.3
Connecting XBT Terminals to a PLC
77
8.4
Connecting XBT N401 / R411 / RT511 Terminals to a Printer
89
65
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 280 of 416
66
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 281 of 416
8.1
Grounding and Safety
Safety Information Concerning the Grounding of Terminals

Danger of Pointto-Point
Connections
Between
Separate
Buildings
Care must be taken when XBT terminals are directly connected to a PLC that is
located in another building. When you remove the cable from the terminal, you will
loose the protective earth ground of the terminal. Since these 2 buildings can have
different earth grounds, unplugging the cable from the terminal can lead to an
electric shock created by a ground loop (voltage potential difference between two
separate buildings).
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DUE TO IMPROPER GROUNDING
z
z
Remove power before installing or maintaining equipment.

Ensure the equipment is properly grounded to the service entrance of the
building.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
67
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 282 of 416
Point-to-point connections between separate buildings
5
3
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
building 1
building 2
PLC
XBT RT
signal cable
earth ground of building 1
earth ground of building 2
resistance R between the 2 earth grounds
68
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 283 of 416
8.2
Connecting XBT Terminals to a PC
At a Glance
Overview
The following sections provide information on how to connect XBT terminals to a PC

for exchanging software configuration data.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Distinguishing XBT Terminals by Power Supply
70
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by the PLC to a PC
71
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by an External Power Supply to a PC
74
69
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 284 of 416

Overview
For exchanging software configuration data with Vijeo-Designer Lite, connect your
XBT terminal to a PC running the Vijeo-Designer Lite configuration software.
The correct cabling depends on whether your XBT terminal is
z
z
powered by the PLC

powered by an external 24 VDC power supply
The following XBT terminals need 5 V power that must be supplied by the PC in this
case:
z
z
z
z
XBT N200
XBT N400
XBT R400
XBT RT500
CAUTION
z XBT N200
z XBT N400
z XBT R400
z XBT RT500
The following XBT terminals need an external power supply supplying 24 VDC:
z
z
z
z
z
z
XBT N410
XBT N401
XBT NU400
XBT R410
XBT R411
XBT RT511
70
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 285 of 416
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by the PLC to a PC

Overview
The following XBT terminals need 5 V power that is usually supplied by the PLC:
z
z
z
z
XBT N200
XBT N400
XBT R400
XBT RT500
When connecting these terminals to a PC for exchanging software configuration

data with Vijeo-Designer Lite, the 5 V required by the terminal must be provided by
the PC.
CAUTION
VOLTAGE DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT
Connect the serial link connector with power off and tighten connector screws.
Note: For connecting XBT terminals to a PC use the Schneider cables described
in the following sections.
71
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 286 of 416
Connecting
XBT N200 / N400
/ R400 to a PC
XBT N200 / N400 and R400 terminals can be connected to a PC in 2 different ways:
z
z
via the serial port of the PC using the Schneider cable XBT Z945
via the USB port of the PC using the Schneider cables XBT Z925 and TSXCUSB485
Connecting XBT N200 / N400 / R400 to a serial port of a PC using the Schneider
cable XBT Z945
Connecting XBT N200 / N400 / R400 to a USB port of a PC using the Schneider
cables XBT Z925 and TSX-CUSB485.
XBT N200 and XBT N400 without logo: you must add a XBT ZN999 cable adapter.
72
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 287 of 416
Connecting
XBT RT500 to a
PC
XBT RT500 terminals can be connected to a PC in 2 different ways:

z
z
via the serial port of the PC using the Schneider cable XBT Z945 and the adaptor
XBTZRT999
via the USB port of the PC using the Schneider
cables XBT Z925 and TSX-CUSB485
W
ARNING
Connecting XBT RT500 to a serial port of a PC using the Schneider cable XBT Z945
and the adaptor XBT ZRT999
ARNING
W
Connecting XBT RT500 to a USB port of a PC using the Schneider cables

XBT Z925 and TSX-CUSB485
73
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 288 of 416
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by an External Power Supply to a PC

Overview
z
z
z
z
z
z
XBT N410
XBT N401
XBT NU400
XBT R410
XBT R411
XBT RT511
When connecting these terminals to a PC for exchanging software configuration

data with Vijeo-Designer Lite it is also required to connect an external power supply
via the 24 VDC power supply connector that is included in the scope of delivery of
these XBT terminals.
CAUTION
Note: For connecting these XBT terminals to a PC use the Schneider cables
described in the following sections.
74
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 289 of 416
Connecting
XBT N410 / N401
/ NU400 / R410 /
R411 to a PC
XBT N410 / N401 / NU400 / R410 / R411 terminals can be connected to a PC in 2

different ways:
z
z
via the USB port of the PC using the Schneider cables XBT Z925 and
TSX-CUSB485
Connecting XBT N410 / N401 / NU400 / R410 / R411 to a serial port of a PC using
the Schneider cable XBT Z915
Connecting XBT N410 / N401 / NU400 / R410 / R411 to a USB port of a PC using
the Schneider cables XBT Z925 and TSX-CUSB485
75
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 290 of 416
Connecting
XBT RT511 to a
PC
XBT RT511 terminals can be connected to a PC in 2 different ways:

z
z
via the USB port of the PC using the Schneider
cables XBT Z925 and TSX-CUSB485
W
ARNING
Connecting XBT RT511 to a serial port of a PC using the Schneider cable XBT Z945
ARNING
W
Connecting XBT RT511 to a USB port of a PC using the Schneider cables

XBT Z925 and TSX-CUSB485
1
2
76
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 291 of 416
8.3
Connecting XBT Terminals to a PLC
At a Glance
Overview
The following sections provide information on how to connect XBT terminals to a

PLC for controlling an automation system.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
78
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by the PLC to a PLC
80
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by an External Power Supply to a PLC
84
77
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 292 of 416

Overview
For controlling an automation system, connect your XBT terminal to a PLC.

The correct cabling depends on whether your XBT terminal is
z
z
powered by the PLC

powered by an external 24 VDC power supply
The following XBT terminals need 5 V power that must be supplied by the PLC in
this case:
z
z
z
z
XBT N200
XBT N400
XBT R400
XBT RT500
CAUTION
z XBT N200
z XBT N400
z XBT R400
z XBT RT500
z
z
z
z
z
z
XBT N410
XBT N401
XBT NU400
XBT R410
XBT R411
XBT RT511
78
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 293 of 416
Data Exchanged
Between XBT
Terminals and
PLCs
Since data are continuously exchanged in a human/machine dialog between an

XBT terminal and a PLC please consider the following recommendations.
Loss of communication between the terminal and the PLC can result in partial or
complete loss of control of the machine.
Unplugging the PLC cable during operation may lead to the loss of requests or
responses exchanged between the terminal and the PLC.
WARNING
z
z
Never remove the PLC cable from the XBT terminal while operations are in
progress.
Check the XBT terminal connection by monitoring the communication
monitoring word in the dialog table via the PLC program.

equipment damage.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
z
z
z
The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes
of control paths and, for certain critical functions, provide a means to achieve a
safe state during and after a path failure. Examples of critical control functions
are emergency stop and overtravel stop.
Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control
functions.
System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be
given to the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the
link.*
Each implementation of a Magelis XBT N/R/RT must be individually and
thoroughly tested for proper operation before being placed into service.

equipment damage.
*For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), Safety Guidelines
for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control.
79
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 294 of 416
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by the PLC to a PLC

Overview
The following XBT terminals need 5 V power that is usually supplied by the PLC but
may also be supplied by an external 5 VDC power supply:
z
z
z
z
XBT N200
XBT N400
XBT R400
XBT RT500
CAUTION
Connection to
Twido / Micro /
Premium / Nano,
Power by PLC
Use the Schneider cable XBT Z9780 (RS485) to connect XBT N200 / N400 / R400
or RT500 terminals to the following Schneider PLCs that provide the required
5 VDC:
z
z
z
z
Twido
Micro
Premium
Nano
Connection to Twido / Micro / Premium / Nano via Schneider cable XBT Z9780
(RS485)
80
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 295 of 416
Connection to
Modicon M340,
Power by PLC
Use the Schneider cable XBT Z9980 (RS485) to connect XBT N200 / N400 / R400
or RT500 terminals to a Modicon M340 PLC that provides the required 5 VDC.
Connection to
Tesys U, Altivar,
Lexium 05, Zelio,
Preventa
XPS MC, Power
by External
Power Supply
To connect XBT N200 / N400 / R400 or RT500 terminals to the following PLCs use
the Schneider ABL8MEM05040 power supply to provide the required 5 VDC
together with the adaptor XBT ZRTPW and the Schneider cable XBT Z9980
(RS485):
Connection to Modicon M340 via Schneider cable XBT Z9980 (RS485)
z
z
z
z
z
Tesys Model U
Altivar
Lexium 05
Zelio with communication module
Preventa XPSMC
Connection to Tesys Model U, Altivar, Lexium 05, Zelio (with communication

module) or Preventa XPSMC with ABL8MEM05040 power supply with adaptor XBT
ZRTPW and Schneider cable XBT Z9980 (RS485)
81
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 296 of 416
XBT RT500 terminals require different cables for connecting them to individual
PLCs.
Connection to PLCs using the XBT ZG939 and the XBT ZRTPW cable adapter:
ARNING
W
Connecting
XBT RT500 to
other Devices
Cabling with PLCs:

PLC
Advantys STB
Cable
+ XBT ZG939
cable adapter
+ XBT ZRTPW
for power
supply
XBT Z9715 (RS232)
Momentum
XBT Z9711 (RS232C)
Quantum / 984
XBT Z9710 (RS232C)
Rockwell Micrologix
XBT Z9733 (RS232)
Rockwell SLC500, Drop 1761NETAIC
XBT Z9734 (RS485)
Siemens S7-200
XBT ZG9721 (RS485)
Omron CPM1,CPM2 , CJ1 , CS1
XBT Z9743 (RS232
Mitsubishi FX
XBT Z980 (RS232)
82
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 297 of 416
Communication
Interruption with
XBT N200 or
XBT N400
Terminals
A communication interruption may have occurred if ????? is displayed rather than

any values, or the connection popup remains on the display unit. If you are using an
XBT N200 or an XBT N400 terminal, it may be caused by the cabling because
different cables are required for the different terminal versions. Use the cables as
shown in the table below. If you are using other terminals or the condition still
persists with these cable, refer to section Troubleshooting, p. 168 or to the manual
describing the protocol you are using for more information.
RJ45 connector compatibility table
XBT N Front Panel
Cable
Without Telemecanique or Schneider Electric logo XBT Z978

XBT Z9780 + XBT ZN999 adaptor
Application example: XBT N without Telemecanique logo
connected via XBT Z9780 cable and XBT ZN999 adaptor
With Telemecanique or Schneider Electric logo
XBT Z9780
83
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 298 of 416
Connecting XBT Terminals Powered by an External Power Supply to a PLC

Overview
z
z
z
z
z
z
XBT N410
XBT N401
XBT NU400
XBT R410
XBT R411
XBT RT511
When connecting these terminals to a PLC for controlling an automation system it is

also required to connect an external power supply via the 24 VDC power supply
connector that is included in the scope of delivery of these XBT terminals.
CAUTION
Note: For connecting these XBT terminals to a PLC or a fieldbus tap use the
Schneider cables described in the following sections.
84
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 299 of 416
Connecting
XBT N410 / N401
/ NU400 / R410 /
R411 to a PLC
XBT N410 / N401 / NU400 / R410 / R411 terminals require different cables for
connecting them to individual PLCs or fieldbus taps.
Use the Schneider cable XBT Z938 (RS485) to connect XBT N410 / N401 / NU400
/ R410 / R411 to the following Schneider PLCs:
z
z
z
z
z
Tesys Model U
Altivar
Lexium 05
Preventa XPSMC
Connection via the Schneider cable XBT Z938 (RS485)
To connect your XBT terminal to other PLCs or fieldbus taps refer to the lists below
showing the adequate cables.
Connection to PLCs or fieldbus taps using different Schneider cables:
Cabling with PLCs:

PLC
Cable
Advantys STB
XBT Z988 (RS232)
Momentum
XBT Z9711 (RS232C)
Quantum / 984
XBT Z9710 (RS232C)
Twido/Micro/Premium/Nano
XBT Z968 / Z9680 (RS485)
Modicon M340
XBT Z938 (RS485)
85
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 300 of 416
PLC
Cable
Rockwell SLC500 , Drop 1761NETAIC
XBT Z9730 (RS232)
Rockwell Micrologix
XBT Z9731 (RS232)
Mitsubishi FX
XBT Z980 (RS232/RS422)
Siemens S7-200
XBT Z9721 (RS485)
Omron CPM1 , CPM2 , CJ1 , CS1
XBT Z9740 (RS232)
Cabling with fieldbus taps:

PLC
Cable
LU9 GC3
XBT Z938 (RS485)
SCA62 (multipoint)
XBT Z908 (RS485)
SCA64
XBT Z908 (RS485)
TWDXCAT3RJ, TWDXCAISO
XBT Z938 (RS485)
86
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 301 of 416
Connecting
XBT RT511 to a
PLC
XBT RT511 terminals require different cables for connecting them to individual
PLCs or fieldbus taps.
Use the Schneider cable XBT Z9980 (RS485) to connect XBT RT511 to the
following Schneider PLCs:
z
z
z
z
z
Tesys Model U
Altivar
Lexium 05
Preventa XPSMC
W
ARNING
Connection via the Schneider cable XBT Z9980 (RS485)
To connect your XBT terminal to other PLCs or fieldbus taps refer to the lists below
showing the adequate cables.
ARNING
W
W
ARNING
Connection to PLCs or fieldbus taps using different Schneider cables:
Direct cable connection
Connection using the XBT ZG939 cable adapter
87
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 302 of 416
Cabling with PLCs:

PLC
Cable
Advantys STB
Momentum
Quantum / 984
+ XBT ZG939 cable adapter
XBT Z9715 (RS232)
XBT Z9711 (RS232C)
XBT Z9710 (RS232C)
Twido/Micro/Premium/Nano
XBT Z9780/Z9782 (RS485)
Modicon M340
XBT Z9980/Z9982 (RS485)
XBT Z9733 (RS232)
Rockwell Micrologix
Rockwell SLC500 , Drop 1761NETAIC
Siemens S7-200
Omron CPM1, CPM2, CJ1 , CS1
XBT Z9734 (RS485)
XBT ZG9721 (RS485)
XBT Z9743 (RS232
Cabling with fieldbus taps:

PLC
LU9 GC3
Cable
+ XBT ZG939 cable adapter
XBT Z9980 (RS485)
SCA62 (multipoint)
XBT Z908 (RS485)
SCA64
XBT Z908 (RS485)
TWDXCAT3RJ, TWDXCAISO
XBT Z9980 (RS485)
88
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 303 of 416
8.4
Connecting XBT N401 / R411 / RT511 Terminals to

a Printer
Printer Connections
Overview
XBT N401, XBT R411 and XBT RT511 terminals provide a MiniDIN connector on
their rear panel for connecting an RS232C printer.
Connecting
XBT N401 / R411
/ RT511 to a
Printer
Use the Schneider cable XBT Z926 to connect your XBT N40, XBT R411 or
XBT RT511 terminal to an RS232C printer.
Printer connection via Schneider cable XBT Z926
89
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 304 of 416
90
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 305 of 416
Overview of Applications and

Functions
At a Glance
Overview
This chapter provides an overview of applications and functions of XBT terminals.
What's in this
Chapter?

Section
Topic
Page
9.1
Overview of Functions
93
9.2
XBT Terminals in HMI Applications
94
9.3
Functions of Keys, Touchscreen, LEDs
97
91
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 306 of 416
Overview of Applications and Functions
92
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 307 of 416
9.1
Overview of Functions
Overview of XBT Terminal Functions

Overview
The flowchart below shows the different functions of XBT terminals.
Representation
Switching on the terminal
Transferring the Vijeo-Designer Lite application to

the XBT terminal: Transfer mode
Automatic switching to
operating mode
Input or modification
Displaying
of process
application panels
parameters
Panel display
Input/Modification
Sending
commands to the
PLC
Discrete
command
Displaying
system panels
Panel display
Default PLC
architecture
Password
Processing alarm panels
Alarms
Printing
Access to protected panels
93
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 308 of 416
9.2
XBT Terminals in HMI Applications
HMI Applications
HMI Application
Example
The figure below shows a typical HMI application with XBT R411.
4
1
2
No.
1
Description
XBT R411: terminal for visualizing data of the PLC
XBT R411: LED indicating the communication status
XBT R411 sends the alarms risen by the PLC on the flow to the printer
PC with Vijeo-Designer Lite for programming the XBT R411
94
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 309 of 416
No.
5
Description
XBT R411: keys for sending commands to the automation system
z changing the panel
z viewing current alarms
z modifying digits in variable edition
z activating the function associated with functional links
XBT R411: keys for modifying parameters of the PLC

z acknowledging alarms
z sending commands to the PLC
z entering values
Connection to a PLC
XBT N and XBT RT terminals provide different operating variants. Depending on the
selected variant the keypad is either in control variant or in input variant or in touch
variant (only XBT RT). In each variant, the individual keys provide different functions
(for further information see Overview of Keys on the Individual XBT Terminals,
p. 39). To indicate the different functions to the user, the key labels are
interchangeable. Blank labels are provided that can be filled with individual texts.
Types of HMI
Applications
Applications for XBT terminals are created in the Vijeo-Designer Lite software. They
can be associated with:
z
z
z
z
Production
Monitoring
Example
production monitoring
preventive maintenance
corrective maintenance
process control
In production monitoring applications XBT terminals display process status

messages.
XBT terminal displaying a process status message:
Automatic operation
Start motor
End of lift
Rotation of grip
Preventive
Maintenance
Example
In preventive maintenance applications XBT terminals count parts for production

monitoring.
95
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 310 of 416
XBT terminal counting parts:

Housing: 7555
Unit: 1200
Corrective
Maintenance
Example
In corrective maintenance applications XBT terminals indicate process conditions.

XBT terminal indicating process conditions:
Oil level low
Door open
Process Control
Example
In process control applications XBT terminals provide process control via

configurable function keys.
XBT terminal providing process control via configurable function keys:
Magelis
Pressurizing
Start cycle
ESC
F1
P
SC
SC
F4
ENTER
As indicated on the display unit of the XBT N in the above figure, the function
pressurizing is controlled by the key named P and the function start cycle is
controlled by the key named SC.
96
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 311 of 416
9.3
Functions of Keys, Touchscreen, LEDs
At a Glance
Overview
The following sections describe the functions of keys, touchscreen and LEDs on the
different XBT terminal types.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Functions of Keys and Touchscreen
98
Functions of LEDs on XBT N401 / XBT R411 / XBT RT511 Terminals
101
97
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 312 of 416
Functions of Keys and Touchscreen

Overview
All XBT terminals provide keys on their front panels that perform different functions.
XBT R and XBT RT terminals provide specific keys, that can have 2 different
functions depending on the current operating mode, the so-called dual labelled
keys.
XBT RT terminals are additionally equipped with a touchscreen that allows
execution of certain functions by pushing elements directly on the display unit of the
terminal.
98
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 313 of 416
Functions of
Keys
The functions of the individual keys provided on XBT terminals are listed in the
following table:
Key
MOD
Key Function
Select a field for edition or move on to the next field each time MOD is pressed
(left to right and top to bottom).
z exit the alarm display

ESC
z return to the previous panel (the last 16 panels are memorized)

z exit an edition without acceptance of the value entered
z navigate in the alarm list or in the history list
z select a digit in a variable field during edition
z Activate the function associated with a functional link:
z
z
z
z
impulse command
toggle command
writing variables
set / reset bit
z go up/down within a panel (for XBT terminals providing the scrolling
function)
z select a functional link in the panel
z increment/decrement the selected digit
z increment/decrement the value of a variable field
z select a value in a selection list, and modify a digit in a variable field during
input
z delete the selected digit or field
DEL
z confirm a selection
z confirm an edition
ENTER
z acknowledge an alarm
static function keys
F1
z access a panel
z execute an impulse command
z execute a toggle command
z modify a value
only for XBT RT: dynamic function keys having panel-dependant functions
R1
z access a panel
z execute an impulse command
z execute a toggle command
z set / reset bit
99
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 314 of 416
Dual Labelled
Keys on XBT R
and XBT RT
Terminals
XBT R and XBT RT terminals provide dual labelled keys.

For XBT R terminals this means that keys F1 to F12 are function as well as numeric
keys, i.e. they can act as function keys as well as service keys.
They operate as follows:
z
z
If the user is not modifying a value, the keys act as function keys.
If the user is modifying the value of a field, the keys automatically act as service
keys for edition mode.
Note: It is impossible to enter a value if a function key has been pressed, in the
same way that it is impossible to leave edition mode if the value of a field is being
modified.
For XBT RT terminals operated in touch variant, this means that keys F1 to F4 have
different functions, depending on the selected terminal mode.
z
z
Touchscreen on
XBT RT
Terminals
In edition mode, keys F1 to F4 act as arrow keys.

In normal mode, keys F1 to F4 act as static function keys.
XBT RT terminals are equipped with a touchscreen that allows execution of

functions by pushing elements directly on the display unit of the terminal.
You can activate HMI objects for edition mode by directly pressing the requested
object on the touchscreen.
You can activate the function of a button displayed on the display unit of the terminal
by directly pressing on this button.
CAUTION
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
z
z
Activate the touchscreen with fingers only.

Never use sharp instruments, such as screwdrivers, as they may damage the
touchscreen.
100
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 315 of 416
Functions of LEDs on XBT N401 / XBT R411 / XBT RT511 Terminals

Overview
The table below lists the functions of the LEDs provided on XBT N401, XBT R411
and XBT RT511 terminals.
LED
Color
Status
Meaning
Communication
Amber
Off
No cable or no communication
Blinking
Communication OK
Alarms
Red
ALARM
Touch
Green
Alarm list:
Off
Empty
On
Alarms already displayed
Blinking
New alarms not previously displayed
Only available for XBT RT 511

Off
When there is no activity on the touchscreen or

function key
On
When you press the touchsceeen or function keys
Off
Key inactive
Input variant
Up/Down
Green
On
Possibility of going up/down within a panel
Blinking
Indicates the possibility:

z of selecting a value in a list
z of incrementing/decrementing the selected digit
Off
On
These LEDs are governed by the automation system.

Their state is determined entirely by the application
program of the automation system governing the
terminal. As a result, their role can vary from
application to application:
z Signaling linked to the key (same type of role as
the system LEDs above)
z Signaling the status or a condition of the
component governed by the key
Control variant
LED for static function keys
F1
Green
(XBT N)
Amber
(XBT R/
RT)
101
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 316 of 416
102
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 317 of 416
Operating Principles of XBT

Terminals
10
At a Glance
Overview
This sections describes general principles concerning the operation of XBT

terminals.
What's in this
Chapter?

Section
10.1
Topic
Page
Modes of Operation
105
10.2
Panel Structure of XBT Terminals
112
10.3
General Configuration Settings
125
10.4
Password-Protection
131
103
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 318 of 416
Operating Principles of XBT Terminals
104
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 319 of 416
10.1
Modes of Operation
At a Glance
Overview
This section provides an overview of the 2 modes of operation of XBT terminals and
describes their selection process.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Introduction
106
Automatic Selection of the Mode of Operation
107
Transfer Mode
108
Operating Mode
110
105
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 320 of 416
Introduction
Overview
Magelis XBT terminals provide the following 2 modes of operation:

z
z
In Transfer mode dialog applications can be exchanged between the PC

running the Vijeo-Designer Lite software and the Magelis XBT terminal.
In Operating mode data is exchanged between the XBT terminal and the
automation system (controlling the latter).
Transfer mode
Magelis/Vijeo-Designer Lite application transfer
Only one mode at a time
Operating mode
Communication with the PLC
These 2 modes of operation will be described in the following sections.
106
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 321 of 416
Automatic Selection of the Mode of Operation

Overview
On power-up, the XBT terminal automatically detects the equipment connected on

its serial link and enables the suitable mode of operation (only one mode at a time).
Process of
Selecting the
Mode of
Operation
Graphical presentation of the process of selecting the mode of operation

Power-up
Self-tests
XBT terminal
connected to PC
XBT terminal
connected to PLC
OR
Enter
password
Access to
protected HMI objects
Operating
mode
communication with the
automation system
Invalid
password
Transfer
mode
data transfer between
XBT terminal and PC
HMI objects not

protected
107
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 322 of 416
Transfer Mode
Overview
In transfer mode the XBT terminal communicates with the Vijeo-Designer Lite
configuration software. Software applications can be transferred in both directions.
The XBT terminal automatically enables the transfer mode when it is connected to
a PC via a communication cable. No operator action on the terminal is necessary in
this mode.
Procedure of
Transferring
Software
Applications
For transferring software applications to or from your XBT terminal perform the
following steps:
Step
Action
Connect your XBT terminal to a PC running the Vijeo-Designer Lite software. For
the suitable Schneider cable see Connecting XBT Terminals to a PC, p. 69.
Result: The XBT terminal automatically detects the connection to a PC, enables
the transfer mode and waits for software application transfer.
From the Vijeo-Designer Lite software at your PC start the software application
transfer.
For transferring software configuration data from the PC to the XBT terminal,
select the menus Device Download....
For transferring software configuration data from the XBT terminal to the PC,
select the menus Device Upload....
XBT terminals that are equipped with a communication LED indicate data
interchange with a PC by a blinking communication LED.
108
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 323 of 416
Transfer Mode
Process
Transfer mode application example

Download: Loading the human/machine dialog application into the XBT
terminal.
Upload: Transferring an application from the XBT terminal to the PC.
No.
Description
XBT N401
Transfer cable (for a list of Schneider cables refer to Connecting XBT Terminals to
a PC, p. 69)
PC with Vijeo-Designer Lite
109
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 324 of 416
Operating Mode
Overview
The operating mode is used for data interchange between the XBT terminal and the
automation system to control the automation system. The following tasks can be
performed in this mode of operation:
z
z
z
z
panel display
edition/modification of automation system architecture parameter values
process control (discrete)
viewing and acknowledging alarms
The XBT terminal automatically enables the operating mode when it is connected to
a PLC via a communication cable.
Accessing
Panels in
Operating Mode
When the XBT terminal is connected to a PLC, the XBT terminal automatically
displays the default panel after start-up. This default panel allows navigation to the
remaining panels.
To navigate between panels and to access a selected panel use the arrow keys of
your XBT terminal:
Arrow Keys
Function
To navigate to another panel, press the up and down arrows of your
XBT terminal.
To access a selected panel, press the right arrow of your XBT

terminal.
110
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 325 of 416
Example of
Accessing
Panels in
Operating Mode
The following 2 figures illustrate how to navigate from a default panel to a panel of
your choice (target panel).
Default panel
---1 - Display
2 - Control
3 - Maintenance
To open the Maintenance panel, press the arrow down key twice to select and then
click the arrow right key to open it.
Target panel
MAINTENANCE
----OP. DURATIONS
SYSTEM PAGES
111
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 326 of 416
10.2
Panel Structure of XBT Terminals
At a Glance
Overview
XBT terminals display panels on their display unit. These panels can contain notanimated objects (e.g. background images, static texts) and not animated HMI
objects (e.g. value displays, bar graphs). 3 different types of are used in XBT
terminals:
z
z
z
What's in this
Section?
application panels
alarm panels
system panels

Topic
Page
Principle of Application Panels
113
Displaying Application Panels
114
Principle of Alarm Panels
118
Alarm Management
119
Principle of System Panels
122
Displaying System Panels
123
Scrolling within Panels
124
112
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 327 of 416
Principle of Application Panels

Definition
Application panels are panels designed to provide information about the automation
system architecture being run. They also serve to clarify any operation that the
operator might have to carry out in a given context.
Application panels can be interlinked to create authorized sequences during
operation.
Unauthorized operators can be prevented from displaying protected panels.
113
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 328 of 416
Displaying Application Panels

Default Panel on
Power-Up
When designing the application in Vijeo-Designer Lite, the designer can select a
default panel.
When the terminal is powered up, this is the first panel to be displayed.
There are different ways to display application panels:
z
z
z
z
z
z
by pressing function keys

by activating navigation links provided on other application panels
by pressing a button object or an active area on the touchscreen (XBT RT only)
by pressing dynamic function keys Ri on products supporting this function
via the PLC
by activating links provided on system panels
Via Function
Keys
It is possible to display a panel directly by pressing a function key.
Example
Pressing a function key for opening a specific panel:

Magelis
On
ESC
F1
F2
F3
F4
ENTER
1
1
function key
114
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 329 of 416
Via Button
Object or Active
Area on
Touchscreen
By using the touchscreen of XBT RT terminals operated in touch variant you can
directly access a specific panel by pressing a button object or an active area
provided on the actually displayed application panel.
Pressing a button for opening a specific panel:
Magelis
Magelis
Conveyor
----Startup
On/Off ON
Control
---Conveyor
Hopper
Via Navigation
Links
You can directly access a specific panel by using a navigation link provided on the
actually displayed application panel.
The following 2 figures illustrate how to navigate to a specific panel using a
navigation link.
Source panel
---1 - Display
2 - Control
3 - Maintenance
1
1
Navigation link
To navigate directly to the Maintenance panel, select the arrow next to

Maintenance and activate this link (by using the arrow keys of the front panel or
directly touching the arrow on the touchscreen).
Target panel
MAINTENANCE
----OP. DURATIONS
SYSTEM PAGES
115
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 330 of 416
Via the PLC
A specific panel is displayed because the program has written the number of the
panel to be processed in a word in the dialog table (for more information see
Exchanging Data with the Automation System via the Dialog Table, p. 163).
The following figure illustrates how a specific panel is opened by the PLC.
PLC opening a specific panel
5
2
%MW100
25
25
%MW100
No.
1
Description
Program, Display panel 25
Table read by the terminal
Display panel 25
Write acknowledgment, panel to be processed H'FFFF'
Dialog table
The PLC dialog table contains the number of the panel to be processed (1). The XBT
terminal reads the dialog table in the PLC (2) and displays the desired panel (3).
Once the command has been processed, the XBT terminal writes the value HFFFF
in the panel to be processed word (4), to acknowledge the request to the PLC
program.
116
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 331 of 416
From System
Panels
You can directly access a specific panel by using a navigation link provided on a
system panel.
The following figure shows a system panel providing links to application panels.
System panel with links to application panels
LIST OF PAGES
LIST OF ALARMS
To navigate directly to the LIST OF ALARMS panel, select the arrow next to LIST
OF ALARMS and activate this link (by using the arrow keys of the front panel or
directly touching the arrow on the touchscreen).
For more information about system panels, see Principle of System Panels, p. 122
117
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 332 of 416
Principle of Alarm Panels

Objective
An alarm panel has the same characteristics as an application panel with respect to:
z
z
the text
the fields
The first line of an alarm panel is preconfigured (by Vijeo-Designer Lite) to show:
z
z
z
the dates and times of alarm appearance/disappearance and acknowledgment

the ranking of the alarm in the alarm list
the total number of alarms in the list
The advantage of an alarm panel lies in its event-triggered display. Each alarm
panel is associated with a word bit in the dialog table.
If the bit is at state 1, the panel is displayed and the text blinks.
Example
Example of an alarm panel

1
A 31/01 17:35 3/7
CONVEYOR FAULT
Switch off.
Remove the part.
1 Line time-stamped by the XBT terminal (A for Alarm), the alarm text appears
blinking and changes to a steady display once it has been acknowledged.
Listing Alarms in
Operating Mode
When an alarm appears, it is often the consequence of other alarms. Due to their
priority system, XBT terminals can display the most important alarm, i.e. the
alarm that is presenting the highest risk to the automation system architecture.
All alarms are time-stamped on appearance.
118
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 333 of 416
Alarm Management
Alarm Indication
The actual display of an alarm depends on the priority it has been allocated (see
section Display Priority below).
Alarms pending on the automation system architecture are stored in an alarm list.
The graphic below shows an Alarm LED.
ALARM
The Alarm LED continuously informs the operator about the state of the alarm list:
z
z
z
Display Priority
Off: The alarm list is empty.

Blinking: The alarm list contains alarms which have appeared since the alarm list
was viewed (new alarms).
On: The alarm list contains alarms which occurred before the alarm list was
viewed (alarms already displayed).
A priority can be associated with each alarm panel. An alarm panel has priority over
an application panel and a system panel. An alarm panel does not have priority over
a value, which is currently being entered.
Different alarm panels may have different priorities. There are 16 possible levels of
priority (the lowest display priority being priority no. 16).
Exception of
Priority 0
When an alarm appears on the automation system architecture that is allocated to

a priority 0 alarm panel, the following will happen:
z
z
The alarm panel is not displayed, but stored in the alarm list, thus the current
display will not be disturbed.
The alarm LED blinks to signal the alarm.
When an alarm is activated, it is stored in the alarm list by the terminal.

Appearance
Types
Alarm panels can appear in different ways. Alarm panels can be:
z
z
z
displayed directly on the display unit

printed directly from XBT terminals equipped with a printer connector (datastream printing)
stored in the list of current alarms
119
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 334 of 416
Storage Principle
in the Alarm List
If the alarms have equal priority, they are stored from the oldest to the most recent.
If the display unit is available (i.e., not occupied by a higher-priority display), the
oldest alarm is displayed. In an automation system, it is often the oldest alarm that
is the most interesting, as the more recent alarms are often a consequence of the
condition signaled by the first alarm (classic case of bursts of alarms).
If alarms with higher priority occur the following will happen:
z
z
Alarms with higher priority are stored at the top of the list.
If the display unit is available (i.e., not occupied by a higher-priority display), the
new alarm with highest priority will be displayed.
Buzzer for
Alarms
Notification
You can set alert sounds to inform you of alarms by activating the buzzer of the
XBT RT511 terminal.
Acknowledgment of Alarms
When designing alarm panels, it is possible to define whether the alarm panel
should be acknowledged systematically by the operator (obligatory
acknowledgment) or not.
ENTER
To acknowledge the alarm panel on the display press ENTER. The alarm message
changes to a steady display.
Depending on the choice made, management of these 2 types of alarm is as follows:
Alarms which must be acknowledged
(obligatory)
Alarms which can be acknowledged but

do not have to be
An alarm, which must be acknowledged,

remains in the alarm list until it is
acknowledged by the operator, even if the
cause of the alarm has disappeared.
An alarm, which can be acknowledged but

does not have to be, disappears from the
alarm list as soon as the cause of the alarm
has disappeared, regardless of whether or
not it has been acknowledged by the
operator.
Advantage: Picks up transient conditions

(instability of a discrete sensor, for example).
Advantage: The display unit is not

monopolized by displaying alarms
considered to be of minor importance to the
application.
120
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 335 of 416
Alarm Log
The terminals can manage a log of the alarm panels. They store the alarm panels
with the text, but without variable values (for more information, see Alarm Log,
p. 156).
Display Principle
of Alarm Panels
Representation
An alarm
occurs
ALARM
The ALARM LED blinks. The alarm is stored in

the alarm list.
Edition
in progress
Yes
End of edition or
edition aborted
Yes
Acknowledgment or
disappearance of this alarm
No
Alarm with
higher priority
already
displayed
No
The highest priority alarm that is the oldest alarm not appearing
in the list is displayed
121
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 336 of 416
Principle of System Panels

Definition
System panels are predefined panels which are used to perform operations relating
to the XBT terminal "system".
In operating mode, these panels can be accessed in the same way as application
panels.
System panels are panels processed as if they were application type panels. Hence
they are stored with the application panels in the developed application file.
There are 3 types of system panels:
z
z
z
standard system panels, which can be called by accessing an application panel

(numbers 1 to 100)
system panels, which cannot be called by accessing an application panel
(numbers 101 to 200)
popup/message system panels, which cannot be called (numbers 201 to 300)
The advantage of being able to view these panels with Vijeo-Designer Lite is that
system messages can be translated.
122
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 337 of 416
Displaying System Panels

Overview
System panels are accessed by means of function keys or navigation links.

When designing the application in Vijeo-Designer Lite, the designer can choose the
system panels that should be associated with these keys, or these links.
List of System
Panels
The following system panels are available to HMI operators:

Number Name
Description
panel list
displays a list of all application panels you can access,

depending on your security access level
The panels protected by password are listed only. The
current security access level is in conformance with the
security access level of the panel.
alarm list
displays a list of all the active alarms triggered by the

automation system
alarm history
displays a list of the last events of the alarm history (coming

alarms, going alarms, communication interruptions)
password
On this panel you can enter the password to change the

security access level (A, B, C, or blank password).
10
default system
panel
When a terminal cannot boot and displays a certain panel

(for example, the first panel is protected by password), then
the terminal displays the default system panel automatically.
22
language
On this panel you can choose the language of the terminal.
30
printer
displays the communication parameters for the second

serial line (only significant for terminals supporting a second
serial line)
100
protocol
displays the parameters for the communication with the

equipment connected on the automation network
110
advanced
displays internal alarm counters

These internal alarm counters can be of interest during calls
to the technical support.
123
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 338 of 416
Scrolling within Panels

Overview
Scrolling is necessary in XBT N and XBT R terminals to view the entire panel that
contains more lines than the display unit can display. When opening a panel the first
n (n being the number of lines on the display unit) lines of this panel are displayed
on the display unit. For example, four lines for the XBT N400 terminal.
Example
The other lines can be displayed by scrolling up or down the panel using the up and
down keys on the keypad.
GRADER
Main menu
---1 - Display
Main menu
---1 - Display
2 - Control
---1 - Display
2 - Control
3 - Maintenance
Main menu
---1 - Display
2 - Control
124
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 339 of 416
10.3
General Configuration Settings
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes general settings concerning the HMI language, the date and
time format as well as access to product reference and line parameters.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Accessing Configuration Parameters via the System Panel SYSTEM
126
Selecting the HMI Language
127
Selecting the Date and Time Format
128
Accessing the Product Reference
129
Accessing the Line Parameters
130
125
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 340 of 416
Accessing Configuration Parameters via the System Panel SYSTEM

Overview
It is possible to configure certain terminal parameters when the terminal is in

operating mode, without going into Vijeo-Designer Lite.
The configuration parameters are accessed via the SYSTEM system panel (for
displaying system panels, see Displaying System Panels, p. 123).
HMI LANGUAGE
DATE/TIME
126
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 341 of 416
Selecting the HMI Language

Overview
In the HMI Language system panel choose one of the languages configured by the
designer.
HMI LANGUAGE
127
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 342 of 416
Selecting the Date and Time Format

In the DATE/TIME panel set the current date and time and define the date and time
display format of your choice.
15/10/2001
10:32:16
Entering Date
and Time
The date and time values are entered in the same way as a variable alphanumeric
field (for further information see Entering a Value in an Edition Field, p. 148).
Selecting
Display Format
The format can be configured using the Vijeo-Designer Lite program, during terminal
configuration.
The time format selected applies to all times and dates processed by the software,
including the dates and times printed and/or displayed in the log and in the alarm list.
Example
The following display formats are available:

Date formats
Time formats
DD/MM/YYYY
24:mm:ss
MM/DD/YYYY
12:mm:ss
YYYY/MM/DD
Please note that the time you entered is only valid as long as the terminal is powered
on. As soon as you power off the product the time will be lost.
128
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 343 of 416
Accessing the Product Reference

Overview
The references of the XBT terminals can be accessed from the system panels.
The references of the XBT terminal can be obtained if the designer has provided
access to these panels (link to the system panels).
The following information is displayed:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
product reference
name of the application developed in Vijeo-Designer Lite
date and time when the application file was saved in Vijeo-Designer Lite
communication protocol name
version of Vijeo-Designer Lite used to create the application
XBT terminal BIOS reference and version
XBT terminal application software reference and version
Note: The most important information is placed on the first few lines so that it is
displayed consecutively, avoiding the need to scroll through the panel.
129
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 344 of 416
Accessing the Line Parameters

Overview
System panels contain detected error counters whose content is protocoldependent. For further information refer to the XBT protocol manual describing the
protocol you are using.
130
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 345 of 416
10.4
Password-Protection
Accessing Password-Protected Panels, Fields, Functional Links

Protection
To be sure that only authorized persons are able to read and write data, it is possible
to protect:
z
z
z
access to panels
modification of fields
control via functional links
If an operator does not have authorization:

z
z
Password
protected panels no longer appear in the list of panels

protected fields behave as if they had been configured as read-only
To access password-protected areas enter your password via the Password

system panel. A navigation link to the Password system panel is required on one of
the application panels. (For more information about how system panels are
displayed, see Displaying System Panels, p. 123).
PASSWORD
---------------: CURRENT
LEVEL RESET
XBT terminals provide three access levels: A, B and C.

The passwords for these levels are defined in Vijeo-Designer Lite. A password
consists of four alphanumeric characters (default value: 1111).
131
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 346 of 416
132
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 347 of 416
Communication Between XBT

Terminals and the Automation
System
11
At a Glance
Overview
This chapter provides information about the communication between XBT terminals
and the automation system, listing the types of commands and how they are
activated as well as the processes of entering / modifying values or handling alarms.
What's in this
Chapter?

Section
Topic
Page
11.1
Types of Commands
135
11.2
Activating Commands
138
11.3
Entering / Modifying Values Alphanumeric Fields in Edition Mode
145
11.4
Handling Alarms
153
11.5
Printing Alarms
157
133
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 348 of 416
Communication with the Automation System
134
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 349 of 416
11.1
Types of Commands
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes the 2 types of commands that can be sent via function keys
(or functional links) or button object on touchscreen of the XBT terminal to the
automation system:
z
z
What's in this
Section?
impulse commands
toggle commands

Topic
Page
Impulse Commands
136
Toggle Commands
137
135
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 350 of 416
Impulse Commands
Impulse
Command
The automation system is activated by pressing a function key (or functional link) or
button object on touchscreen of XBT RT terminals. If the key (or functional link) is
released, the action stops.
Example
Motor command
Key
Bit
released
pressed
released
136
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 351 of 416
Toggle Commands
Toggle
Command
The automation system is activated by pressing the function key (or functional link)
or button object on the touchscreen of XBT RT terminals. If the function key (or
functional link) is pressed again, the action on the control system stops.
Example
Conveyor forward command
Key
Bit
released
pressed
released
pressed
137
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 352 of 416
11.2
Activating Commands
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes the different ways commands can be activated at XBT
terminals.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Activating Commands via Functional Links, Button Objects or Dynamic

Function Keys on the Display Unit
139
Activating Commands via Function Keys on the Display Unit
144
138
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 353 of 416
Activating Commands via Functional Links, Button Objects or Dynamic

Function Keys on the Display Unit
Overview
Functional links, button objects and dynamic functions are integrated by the
application designer on the different panels to create additional control functions.
To activate functional links, use the left and right keys on the front panel of the XBT
terminals.
To activate buttons, press the button directly on the screen if your XBT terminal is
equipped with a touchscreen. If your XBT terminal is not equipped with a
touchscreen, press the MOD key to select the button and the ENTER key to activate
the button.
Example of a button object
Magelis
Conveyor
----Startup
On/Off ON
To activate dynamic functions, use the Ri keys on the front panel of the XBT
terminals. These keys can also be linked to pictograms on screen.
Example of dynamic function keys linked to pictograms on screen
Links, button objects and dynamic functions are programmed by the application
designer to send different types of commands to the equipment from the application
panel:
z
z
z
z
z
impulse commands
toggle commands
set value
reset value
write value
139
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 354 of 416
Functional Link
Example
Magelis
Control
----
Conveyor
Hopper
Magelis
Conveyor
----Startup
On/Off
No.
Description
Change panel (link blinking to indicate that it is active)
Change panel
Toggle (link blinking to indicate that it is active)
140
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 355 of 416
Representation
of Command
Links
Example
2X
Startup
On/Off
Step-by-step
On
1
2
0 = Bit variable associated with link equals 0

1 = Bit variable associated with link equals 1
The operator controls the conveyor step-by-step.

When the operator releases the button, the conveyor stops.
No.
Description
Toggle
Impulse (link blinking to signal that the link is active)
141
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 356 of 416
Buttons
Example of XBT RT in touch variant

Magelis
Control
----
Conveyor
Hopper
Magelis
Conveyor
----Startup
On/Off ON
No.
Description
Push button on touchscreen to go to the Conveyorpanel.
Push button on touchscreen to activate the function.
142
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 357 of 416
Example of XBT RT in No-touch variant

Magelis
Control
----
Conveyor
MOD
Hopper
2
ENTER
Magelis
Conveyor
----Startup
On/Off ON
No.
Dynamic
Function Keys
Description
Press the MOD key once to select the button.
Press the ENTER key to go to the Conveyor panel.
Press MOD and ENTER to activate the function.
Example of dynamic function keys linked to pictograms
No.
Description
Pictograms illustrating the functions of the dynamic function keys.
Dynamic function keys.
143
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 358 of 416
Activating Commands via Function Keys on the Display Unit

Example
Function key
Magelis
On
ESC
F1
F2
F3
F4
ENTER
1
1
Function key
The dialog table enables dialog between the PLC and the terminal. In this table, one
word is reserved to supply the PLC with the status of the function keys in the form
of a word bit.
Bit 15 to
Bit 12
Bit
11
Bit
10
Bit
9
Bit
8
Bit
7
Bit
6
Bit
5
Bit
4
Bit
3
Bit
2
Bit
1
Bit
0
Reserved
F12
F11
F10
F9
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
144
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 359 of 416
11.3
Entering / Modifying Values Alphanumeric Fields

in Edition Mode
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes how to select and modify alphanumeric fields, i.e. fields that
allow to enter characters (A-Z) and numbers (0-9).
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Accessing an Alphanumeric Edition Field
146
Entering a Value in an Edition Field
148
Confirming / Cancelling an Edition
150
Exit Edition on Time Out
151
Edition Report
152
145
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 360 of 416
Accessing an Alphanumeric Edition Field

Overview
Alphanumeric edition fields can either be accessed by the user or by the automation
system.
User Selecting
an Edition Field
To access an alphanumeric edition field, it must first of all be visible on the display
unit. To select the field, press the MOD key of the XBT terminal.
MOD
If there are several edition fields available on the actually displayed panel, press the
MOD key several times in succession to run through the variable fields in edition
mode from left to right and from top to bottom.
You access an alphanumeric edition field on XBT RT terminals in touch variant
directly by touching the screen if an active area has been configured by the HMI
application designer.
Example
Selecting an edition field out of several edition fields on the same panel:
field no. 1
field no. 2
field no. 3
display unit
area
field no. 4
field
field no.
no. 55
1st time MOD is pressed:
If no edition has been made in any field on the display

unit since the panel was displayed, the top left-hand
field on the display unit is the edition field (field no. 1)
Otherwise the edition field will be the one that has
already been edited (field no. 1, 2, 3 or 4).
We will assume that field no. 1 is the edition field

2nd time MOD is pressed:
Edition field no. 2
3rd time MOD is pressed:
Edition field no. 3
4th time MOD is pressed:
Edition field no. 4
5th time MOD is pressed:
Edition field no. 1, etc.
Field no. 5 cannot be the edition field because it is not visible on the display unit.
146
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 361 of 416
Automation
System
Accessing an
Edition Field
The connected device sets a variable field into edition mode by writing its number in
a word in the dialog table. To display the number of variable fields in Vijeo-Designer
Lite, use the Layout Display Fields Indices menu.
In return, the XBT terminal writes the number of the field being completed in a word
in the dialog table (see Exchanging Data with the Automation System via the Dialog
Table, p. 163).
Specific feature of this type of selection:
You cannot select another variable field at the XBT terminal until the one requested
by the connected device has been completed because the MOD key is inactive
during this time.
147
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 362 of 416
Entering a Value in an Edition Field

Input Methods
Before you can enter a value in an edition field, activate the input mode in the XBT
terminal.
After you have activated the input mode for a field, the whole field blinks and the
following edition methods are available:
z
z
z
z
accelerated incremental edition

thumbwheel edition
direct edition
direct edition via virtual numeric keypad
Edition
Methods
Key
Description
Accelerated
Incremental
Edition:
Down/Up
The total value of the field is increased or decreased by pressing the up/down
keys.
Thumbwheel
Edition:
Left/Right
z First, the digit to be modified is selected and starts blinking when the up and
Down/Up
down keys are pressed. (These keys are managed in the same way as a
drum. This means that on reaching one end of the variable field, you go back
to the other end.)
z Next, when the left and right keys are pressed, the digit values are displayed
in one direction or the other (these keys are also managed in the same way
as a drum).
148
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 363 of 416
Edition
Methods
Key
Description
Direct Edition
(XBT R4 only):
Key F1 to F12
Keys F1 to F12 are dual labelled Fx/Nx (function/numeric) keys. They can be
used to modify values directly. The correspondence between keys and numeric
values is as follows:
F1
Key
Value
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
+/-
F12
Direct Input via

Virtual numeric keypad on
Virtual numeric
touchscreen of XBT RT:
Keypad (XBT RT
in touch variant
only):
Activate the individual buttons on the touchscreen with your

finger to enter the respective character.
149
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 364 of 416
Confirming / Cancelling an Edition

Overview
To confirm or to cancel the edition of alphanumeric fields, use the ENTER and ESC
key.
Confirming an
Edition
ENTER key
ENTER
If you press the ENTER key after you have modified an edition field, the entered
value is transmitted to the connected device. Refreshment of the field, which was in
edition mode, is active again.
Canceling an
Edition
ESC key
ESC
If you press the ESC key after you have modified an edition field, the following will
happen:
z
z
z
No write action is performed to the automation system.

The value prior to edition is redisplayed.
Refreshment of the field, which was in edition mode, is active again.
150
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 365 of 416
Exit Edition on Time Out

Overview
If you have enabled edition mode but you do not press any key for more than 1
minute, edition mode will be disabled automatically and the following will happen:
z
z
No write action is performed to the automation system.

Refreshment of the field, which was in edition mode, is active again.
151
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 366 of 416
Edition Report
Overview
After the edition mode has been disabled, the connected equipment is informed of
how the edition ended:
z
z
z
confirmation
cancellation
time out
by updating the Report word in the dialog table.
152
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 367 of 416
11.4
Handling Alarms
At a Glance
Overview
This section describes how to view, ignore and print alarms.

Please note that these functions are not available for XBT N200 terminals.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Viewing or Ignoring Alarms
154
Alarm Log
156
153
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 368 of 416
Viewing or Ignoring Alarms

Overview
When an alarm occurs, it is automatically displayed on the display unit.

An alarm is displayed blinking
A 31/01 17:35 3/7

CONVEYOR FAULT
Switch off.
Remove the part.
You can now view and acknowledge the alarm or you can ignore the alarm.
Viewing Alarms
To view the alarm, use the keys of your XBT terminal as described below:
Key
Description
Scroll through the alarm panel (up to 25 lines).
Scroll through the list of alarm panels.
Press the ENTER key to acknowledge the alarm on the display. The alarm
message stops blinking and changes to a steady display.
ENTER
Press the ESC key to exit viewing alarm panels.

ESC
154
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 369 of 416
Example
Using the left and right arrow keys to scroll through the alarm list:
A 31/01 17:35 1/7

CONVEYOR FAULT
Switch off.
Remove the jammed part.
Ignoring Alarms
A 31/01 17:35 2/7

CONVEYOR FLT1
Change to N2.
To ignore an actual alarm, use the ESC as described below

Key
ESC
Description
If an alarm is displayed during operation, you can press the ESC key to
return to operating mode. The alarm remains in the list and the ALARM
LED changes to a steady display.
155
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 370 of 416
Alarm Log
Log Principles
Alarms are automatically stored in a log file one after another. Once the log file is
full, new alarms overwrite the oldest alarms. In this way each alarm event (for
appearance, acknowledgment, disappearance see Listing Alarms in Operating
Mode, p. 118) is recorded and time-stamped.
Note: XBT R411 and XBT RT511 are the only terminals that permanently save the
log. Any other XBT terminal types loose the information stored in the log when they
are switched off. The retention period for the log is limited to twelve hours. Beyond
that time there is a possibility that the log will be cleared.
Note: In order for an alarm panel to be stored in the log, the store option must be
enabled for the panel.
You can view, clear and print the log which will be described in the following
sections.
Viewing the Log
You can access the alarm log from the MENU system panel (see Displaying System
Panels, p. 123).
MENU system panel
LIST OF ALARMS
ALARMS LOG
Once inside the log, you can browse through the various alarms (see Viewing
Alarms, p. 154 ).
Clearing the Log
To clear the log file proceed as follows:

Step
Action
In the MENU system panel select ALARMS LOG.
In the following panel select CLEAR.

Result: The alarm log is empty.
156
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 371 of 416
11.5
Printing Alarms
At a Glance
Overview
This section provides a general overview of the printing function for alarms.
Please note that this function is only available for XBT N401, XBT R411 and
XBT RT511 terminals.
What's in this
Section?

Topic
Page
Principles of Printing Alarms
158
Printing Alarms as a Data Stream
159
Printing the Alarm Log
160
157
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 372 of 416
Principles of Printing Alarms

Overview
You can print alarms in the following different ways that will be described in the
following sections:
z
z
z
printing alarms as a data stream

printing the alarm log
printing the list of current alarms
158
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 373 of 416
Printing Alarms as a Data Stream

Overview
The alarm name and status are printed whenever an alarm status changes.
The following information are printed:
z
z
z
z
z
alarm number
name of the alarm panel
print date
print time
alarm status
Note: In order for an alarm panel to be printed, the print option must be enabled for
the panel .
Example
!---!-----------------------------!-------------------!--!---!---!
!NUM!
ALARM LIST
!DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS!ON!ACK!OFF!
!---!-----------------------------!-------------------!--!---!---!
!002!VAT2:Alarm number 2
!05/03/2004 09:12:05!XX!
!
!
!05/03/2004 09:10:02! !
!XXX!
!05/03/2004 09:08:48! !XXX!
!
!05/03/2004 09:04:57!XX!
!
!
Alarm 1 appeared, was acknowledged and then disappeared.

Alarm 2 is present but has not been acknowledged.
159
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 374 of 416
Printing the Alarm Log

Initiated by the
Operator
The log is printed in sequential order (sorted by status), with the most recent alarm
at the top.
The following information is printed for each alarm:
z
z
z
z
z
Initiated by the
PLC
its number
date and time of appearance
date and time of acknowledgment
date and time of disappearance
The log is printed by means of the print command word in the dialog table.
The log is printed in sequential order (sorted by status), with the most recent alarm
at the top.
The following information is printed for each alarm:
z
z
z
z
z
alarm number
date and time of appearance
date and time of acknowledgment
date and time of disappearance
Example
!---!-----------------------------!-------------------!--!---!---!
!NUM!
ALARM LIST
!DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS!ON!ACK!OFF!
!---!-----------------------------!-------------------!--!---!---!
!05/03/2004 09:12:05!XX!
!
!
!05/03/2004 09:10:02! !
!XXX!
!05/03/2004 09:08:48! !XXX!
!
!05/03/2004 09:04:57!XX!
!
!
Alarm 1 appeared, was acknowledged and then disappeared.

Alarm 2 is present but has not been acknowledged.
160
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 375 of 416
Vijeo-Designer Lite Configuration

Software
12
At a Glance
Overview
This chapter provides a short reference to the Vijeo-Designer Lite configuration

software for XBT terminals.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic
Page
Creating XBT Terminal Applications
162
Exchanging Data with the Automation System via the Dialog Table
163
161
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 376 of 416
Vijeo-Designer Lite Configuration Software
Creating XBT Terminal Applications

Criteria
An XBT terminal application consists of the entire dialog between the operator and
the automated process. In its entirety, this should take account of:
The criteria relating to the

automation system:
The user criteria:
The criteria for creating the actual

dialog application:
z production monitoring
z user interface
z programming
z preventive maintenance
z level of intervention
z debugging
z corrective maintenance
z upgrading
z process control
Note: These constraints mean that it is necessary to structure your application. An

application should consist of a set of panels that can be arranged in a tree
structure.
Example of a
Panel Tree
Structure
Tree structure
ENGLISH*
----1 - Display
2 - Control
3 - Maintenance
ENGLISH*
SPEED
QUANTITY
Display
----M/min
Amt/hr
ENGLISH*
Control
---Conveyor
Hopper
ENGLISH*
Maintenance
----OP. DURATIONS
SYSTEM PAGES
162
ENGLISH*
OPERATING DURATION
---Machine
hr
Guard
hr
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 377 of 416
Exchanging Data with the Automation System via the Dialog Table
Overview
Dialog tables are integrated in the PLCs that are connected to XBT terminals.
A dialog table is a set of data exchanged between the PLC and the XBT terminal.
Dialog tables are used to inform terminals of alarm states.
For more information on the data exchange between XBT terminals and connected
equipment via dialog tables refer to the Vijeo-Designer Lite online help.
163
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 378 of 416
164
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 379 of 416
Appendices
At a Glance
Overview
This part provides additional information on this manual.
What's in this
Appendix?
The appendix contains the following chapters:

Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
Troubleshooting and Further Information
167
Architectures of Automation Systems
175
165
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 380 of 416
Appendices
166
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 381 of 416
Troubleshooting and Further

Information
At a Glance
Overview
This chapter provides additional information about troubleshooting, alert messages,

internal variables and self-tests of the terminals.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic
Page
Troubleshooting
168
System Messages
170
Internal Variables
172
Terminal Self-Tests
174
167
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 382 of 416
Troubleshooting
Overview
Condition
Cause
Remedy
????? displayed rather

than any values
The transmission parameters set in the

Vijeo-Designer Lite software for the
protocol you are using for communication
are not configured correctly.
Check the transmission parameters in the

dialog box of the Vijeo-Designer Lite
software for the protocol you are using.
For more detailed information refer to the
user manual of this protocol.
No memory allocation for this variable has Allocate memory space for the variable
been declared in the PLC
Cannot read dialog

table message displayed
on terminal
The equipment declared for the variable

does not exist
Modify the list of equipment and check the

declared addresses
The equipment is not connected to the

terminal
Check the connection
The equipment is connected to the

terminal via an XBT Z978 cable
Check the connection. Try using an

XBT Z9780 cable
The equipment is connected to the

terminal via an XBT Z9780 cable
Check the connection. Try using an

XBT Z978 cable (equivalent to an
XBT Z9780 cable equipped with an
XBT ZN999 adaptor).
The equipment declared for the dialog

table does not exist
Modify the list of equipment and check the

declared addresses
No memory allocation for the dialog table Allocate memory space for the dialog
has been declared in the PLC
table in the PLC (e.g., %MW100 to
%MW125)
terminal
Incorrect dialog table

authorization message
The value of the authorization word

stored in the PLC is not correct
Using Vijeo-Designer Lite, check the

expected value (\Configuration\Dialog
Table) for the Authorization Table and its
location in the memory equipment
Product seems to be not

powered (backlight not on
and nothing displayed on
the display unit
XBT N401/NU400: No 24 V power supply Check the power supply

XBT N200/400:
z No power supply via the PC mouse
port.
z Dialog table forces the back-light to
remain off.
z No power supply via the PLC
Check whether the PC mouse port has

been activated (see PC Control Panel),
check the PLC program. Check whether
the cable is connected to the PLC port.
Check that power is being supplied to the
PLC.
communication port in run mode.

168
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 383 of 416
Condition
Cause
Remedy
Cannot read/write variable

message
The equipment declared for the variable

does not exist
Check the addresses declared for the

equipment
The variable does not have a valid

address in the declared device
Check the variable address

terminal
Import impossible XBT-->

PC
Application protected by password
Ask the creator of the application for the

password
Inoperative keys
Locked by the dialog table
Check the PLC program
Incorrect terminal configuration
Check that the terminal configuration is

correct for input or control or touch variant
No application message
No application
Transfer an application
No printing
No connection
Connect the cable and check that it is

connected correctly at both ends. Then
check that the printer is switched on.
The cable connecting the printer to the

terminal is incorrect
Check that the cable is the appropriate

type
Incorrect printer configuration
Refer to the printer manual to check that

the configuration saved by the terminal is
the same as the current configuration
Every other line is printed
The terminal is configured as LF rather

than auto-LF
Abnormal printing
Lines are printing one on top of the other. The terminal is configured as auto-LF
rather than LF
169
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 384 of 416
System Messages
Single-Language
System
Messages
System messages generated by the XBT (single-language system messages:

English), non-configurable.
System Message
Description
APPLICATION FAULT:
Application inconsistency.
AUTOTEST IN PROGRESS:
Autotests running.
BIOS ERROR # x CS:x IP:x:
Critical BIOS issue, consult Schneider Electric.
CHECKSUM FAILED:
Firmware checking result.
DOWNLOAD ABORTED:
Download to the XBT canceled by the operator. Redo a

download.
DOWNLOAD COMPLETED:
Download to the XBT finished.
DOWNLOAD FAILED:
Download to the XBT not completed.
DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS:
Download to the XBT in progress.
FPU ERROR # function x:
Critical math libraries result, consult Schneider Electric.
INCORRECT TERMINAL TYPE IN .DOP FILE:
Application is exported to a terminal type X when it had

been created for a terminal type Y.
KERNEL TRAP #x ES:x IP:x:
Critical real-time kernel result, consult Schneider Electric.
NO APPLICATION:
Product has no application.
PROCESSOR TRAP # x CS:x IP:x:
Critical terminal result, consult Schneider Electric.
RUNTIME ERROR # x CS:x IP:x:
Critical RUNTIME result, consult Schneider Electric.
SWITCH POWER OFF CS:x IP:x:
Critical terminal result, consult Schneider Electric.
UPLOAD ABORTED:
Upload to the PC canceled by the operator.
UPLOAD COMPLETED:
Upload to the PC finished.
UPLOAD FAILED:
Upload to the PC not completed.
UPLOAD IN PROGRESS:
Upload to the PC in progress.
WAITING FOR TRANSFER:
Awaiting remote loading.
WIRING FAULT:
Wiring problem.
170
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 385 of 416
Multi- Languages
System
Messages
XBT system messages (6 languages), which can be translated by Vijeo-Designer

Lite in the system panels.
Number
System Message
Description
#244
ALARM LIST EMPTY:
No alarms logged in the terminal.
#203
CANNOT READ DIALOG TABLE:
Connection problems between XBT <-> PLC.
#241
CANNOT READ VARIABLE:
Variable cannot be read.
#202
CANNOT WRITE DIALOG TABLE:
Writing to a protected zone or XBT <-> PLC connection

problems.
#242
CANNOT WRITE VARIABLE:
Variable cannot be written.
#204
CONNECTION IN PROGRESS:
XBT is trying to connect to the PLC.
#247
DATE FORMAT INVALID:
The date cannot be displayed because of its format.
#201
DIALOG TABLE AUTHORIZATION:
Authorization word is incorrect.
#251
LANGUAGE DOES NOT EXIST:
Language not entered in the XBT.
#250
LANGUAGE IMPOSED BY THE PLC:
Current language determined by the PLC.
#257
LOG CLEARING IN PROGRESS:
Following an operator request, the log is being cleared.
#243
OVERFLOW MIN <= VALUE <= MAX:
Input of a value, which is outside the limits.
#249
PAGE DOES NOT EXIST:
Call-up of a non-existent page.
#253
PASSWORD IMPOSED BY THE PLC:
Current password determined by the PLC.
#258
PRINTING STOPPED BY USER:
The operator sent a request to stop the current print job. The
next job in the print buffer will be printed as soon as the end
of the line in the first print job is reached.
#255
PRINT RECOGNISED:
The print request sent by the operator has been accepted

and placed in the processing buffer: it will be processed as
soon as the current print job is completed.
#254
PROTECTED ACCESS PAGE:
Call-up of a page protected by password.
#256
REFUSED: PRINTING IS ALREADY IN

PROGRESS:
The same print request was sent twice in succession by the

operator before the first print request could be fulfilled. The
request is rejected.
#246
TIME FORMAT INVALID:
The time cannot be displayed because of its format.
#248
WRONG PASSWORD:
Input of an incorrect password.
171
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 386 of 416
Internal Variables
Purpose
List of the
Internal
Variables
XBT terminals provides internal variables you can use to display information on your
panels or to control your terminal.
Variable
Type
Description
%MW0...
%MW299
All
Buffer (This variable is only available in Modbus Slave

applications.)
%MW50000
Word
Date in ASCII
%MW50001
Word
Time in ASCII
%MW50002
Word
Seconds (0 to 59)
%MW50003
Word
Minutes (0 to 59)
%MW50004
Word
Hour
%MW50010 to
%MW50056
Word
Free words
%MW50057
Word
Quick increment from 0 to 65535
%MW50058
Word
Quick decrement from 65535 to 0
%MW50059
Word
Increment from 0 to 9 every 2 seconds
%MW50060
Word
Decrement from 9 to 0 every 2 seconds
%MW10000
Word
Transmission speed
%MW10001
Word
Parity
%MW10005
Word
Address number
%MW10006,0
Bit
Counters reset
%MW10007...
%MW10015
Word
Counters 1...9 (value depending on the protocol)
%MW10026
Word
Mute all buzzer output
%MW10028
Word
Value of the programmed language
%MW10033
String
Password level in progress
%MW10034
String
Password input in progress
%MW10035
Word
Reset current password value (=0 for Reset).
%MW10036
String
Product reference
%MW10037
String
Application name
%MW10038
String
Date of the last application backup
%MW10039
String
Time of the last application backup
%MW10040
String
Protocol name
172
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 387 of 416
Variable
Type
Description
%MW10041
String
Build time version
%MW10042
String
Firmware version
%MW10043
String
Run time name
%MW10044
String
Run time version
%MW10050...
%MW10059
Word
Counter 10...19 (value depending on the protocol)
%MW11000
Word
Value of the panel to be displayed
%MW12000
Word
Values >0 clear the history
%MW12001
Word
Values >0 print the history
%MW12020
Word
Values >0 print the alarm list
%MW12030
Word
Values >0 stop the printing process
%MW60023
Word
Acknowlegment of all alarms
173
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 388 of 416
Terminal Self-Tests
Overview
XBT terminals perform 2 types of self-tests:

z
z
Self-Test PowerUp
Element Tested
self-test during power-up

continuous self-test during operation
When the terminal is powered up, the following self-tests are performed:
Test Principle
Non-passing Result Criterion Action in Event of Non-Passing
The working memory Writing/reading

(RAM)
Value read different from value

written
Operation impossible: STOP
The firmware
Checksum calculation
and checking
Calculated checksum <>

stored checksum
Operation impossible: STOP
The application
memory
Checksum calculation
and checking
Calculated checksum <>

stored checksum
Operation impossible: Transfer

compulsory
Continuous SelfTest
A continuous self-test checks that the program is operating correctly (watchdog).

Note: If a problem is detected that prevents operation of the product, the terminal
turns off all its LEDs, stops working and displays a system message number (if the
detected condition permits it to do so). If the same problem still persists after the
terminal has been switched back on, inform the maintenance department of this
system message number.
174
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 389 of 416
Architectures of Automation
Systems
Types of Architectures of Automation Systems

Communication
via Protocols
Communication between the XBT terminal and connected equipment is achieved by

means of a communication protocol, which is selected when creating the application
in Vijeo-Designer Lite.
The protocols available for the XBT range support communication with the
Schneider range of PLCs, specific equipment (speed drives) and third party PLCs.
Supported protocols are Uni-Telway, Modbus (master and slave), Siemens PPI,
AB DF1, AB DH485, Mitsubishi FX, SYSMAC-WAY. Please note that not all XBT
types support all protocols.
The following types of architecture are possible, which enable 1 XBT terminal to be
linked to several equipment or several XBT terminals to 1 equipment:
z
z
z
point-to-point connections
multipoint connections
multidrop connections
For more information on the protocols, please refer to the Protocols User Manuals.
175
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 390 of 416
Point-to-Point
Connection (all
XBT terminals
1 XBT terminal linked to 1 equipment.
Connected
equipment
Protocols:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Modbus master
Uni-Telway slave
Siemens PPI (*)
AB DF1 (*)
AB DH485 (*)
Mitsubishi FX (*)
SYSMAC-WAY (*)
(*) XBT N200/N400/R400 do not support these protocols.
176
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 391 of 416
Multipoint
Connection
(XBT N401 / N410
/ NU400 / R410 /
R411 / RT511)
1 XBT terminal linked to several equipment (maximum of 15).
PLC 1
PLC 2
Equipment 1
Equipment 2
PLC 3
Equipment 3
Other equipment
Equipment n
Protocols:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Multidrop
Connection
(XBT N401 / N410
/ R410 / R411 /
RT511)
Modbus master
Uni-Telway slave
Siemens PPI
AB DF1
AB DH485
Mitsubishi FX
SYSMAC-WAY
Several XBT terminals linked to 1 equipment
Connected equipment
Protocols:
z
z
Modbus slave
Uni-Telway
177
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 392 of 416
178
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 393 of 416
Glossary
A
alarm panel
Information panel displayed when an alarm occurs on the automation system.

An alarm panel is displayed by the automation system, when the associated boolean
variable changes.
It is generally used to provide to the operator all the information and the description
of the actions he has to do, in order to deal with the current alarm.
alarm table
An alarm table is a communication table that contains only words related to alarm
functions.
Each bit of alarm words can be associated to an alarm.
The equipment can use it to signal to the terminal that an alarm has occurred.
The terminal can use the status words of the alarm table to report to the equipment
that the operator has acknowledged an alarm.
alphanumeric
characters (A-Z) and numbers (0-9)
alphanumeric
display units
These are only capable of displaying characters (with a font resolution usually 5x7
pixels). The characters are physically separated from one another.
alphanumeric
terminals
These are equipped with alphanumeric display units or matrix display units used in
character mode only.
animated HMI
object
Object which representation and behavior depends on operator actions or on

variables belonging to an equipment or to the terminal.
application
Please refer to HMI application.
179
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 394 of 416
Glossary
application
browser
Structure tree representing the HMI application. The application bar is located at the
left of the Vijeo Designer Lite user interface.
application panel
An application panel can be displayed either by the operator or by the equipment of

the automation system.
It can display any information about the automation system.
It allows the operator to input data into the automation system and to navigate from
one panel to others.
automation
system
all components (e.g. PLCs, HMI terminals, sensors, actuators) of an automated

process
B
bitmap
Image with fixed dimensions, which can be handled by a Windows software.
button
Windows object used to perform the action described by the label or the symbol it
contains
A button is validated on touch screen or by pressing the enter key while the button
is selected.
C
command table
Part of the dialog table completed by the control system. This word list contains all
the instructions passed to the terminal.
communication
table
generic word for either a dialog table or an alarm table
configuration
software
Vijeo Designer Lite is the configuration software that allows to create a HMI
application and transfer it between a terminal and an equipment.
current language
The language of the HMI application the designer is working on.
180
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 395 of 416
Glossary
D
default terminal
language
The HMI language used by the terminal when it is powered on.
demo version
Version of Vijeo-Designer Lite used to demonstrate the configuration software.This

version does not allow any transfer of the HMI application between the VijeoDesigner Lite software and an XBT terminal.
designer
Please refer to HMI designer.
dialog
application
Set of data, necessary and sufficient to describe the behavior of a terminal during
operation. Vijeo Designer Lite is the only tool that can be used to create this type of
application for Schneider Electric terminals.
dialog table
A dialog table is a communication table that can contain words related to any
function of the terminal.
A dialog table can include an alarm table.
The purpose of a dialog table is to exchange data or orders between the terminal
and the connected equipment.
download
Transfer of an HMI application from an XBT terminal to Vijeo-Designer Lite.
dynamic
function keys
These keys are placed on the front face of a terminal and their behavior depends on
the displayed panel.You can set different function to them (e.g. panel access,
command functions, object selection).
E
equipment
Any device (generally a PLC) which communicates with a terminal.
external variable
Variable which belongs to an equipment.
181
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 396 of 416
Glossary
F
firmware
This is the terminal on-board software. It comprises mainly the BIOS and the loader
used to communicate with Vijeo-Designer Lite.
H
HMI
human machine interface
HMI application
Names all the data necessary to describe the behavior of an HMI terminal in the
operating mode.
Vijeo Designer Lite is the configuration software that allows to create an
HMI application.
HMI designer (or

designer)
The person who designs an HMI application using Vijeo Designer Lite.
Even if there is no particular training to use Vijeo-Designer Lite, some skills in
process automation are recommended to create a application.
HMI language
An HMI application can be designed in several different languages. Each of these

languages is an HMI language.
HMI object (or

object)
The smallest element contained in a panel. Can be either an animated or an notanimated HMI object.
HMI operator (or

operator)
The person who uses an HMI terminal in operation mode, in order to control and lead
an automated installation or machine.
An operator is a person who does not have any specific skill in process automation
or computer science.
HMI terminal (or

terminal)
Electronic terminal used by operators to control an automation system.

An HMI terminal is mainly used to display information and alarms from the
automation system, to allow the operator to input some parameter values into the
automation system, and to control it.
Basically, a terminal replaces former control panels that were mainly made of push
buttons, lamps, indicators and measurement devices.
182
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 397 of 416
Glossary
I
internal variable
Variable which belongs to the terminal.

Some internal variables provide services (like date/time) that can be used by the
HMI designer without any restriction, as if they were PLC/equipment variables.
L
link
HMI object contained in a panel used to access application panels or system panels
(navigation links) or to perform command functions (command links).
loader
Part of terminal firmware responsible for handling communication with

Vijeo Designer Lite to transfer a application in one direction or the other. Its role is
also to store application data, sent by Vijeo Designer Lite, in the terminal memory.
M
Magelis
Generic commercial name of the all range of Schneider HMI terminals.
matrix display
units
These consist of a continuous matrix of pixels, enabling the display of characters in

different fonts and sizes, and also basic graphics. The technology and resolution of
these display units is, however, too low for them to be considered true graphic
display units.
matrix touch
screen (or touch
screen)
Transparent sheet stuck on a display, composed of a matrix of areas and sensible

to operator action on it.
menu
Title, located in a menu bar, allowing by selection to access a list of menu items.
Each of these menu items is associated with a function.
mode of
operation
There are 2 modes of operation:

z operating mode
z transfer mode
183
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 398 of 416
Glossary
N
not-animated
HMI object
Object which representation is constant. It is always displayed exactly as it has been

configured.
O
object
Please refer to HMI object.
operating mode
A terminals mode of operation in which the terminal communicates with one or

several equipment of an automation system.
This is the normal operating mode of a terminal, when it uses the HMI application.
The operator generally uses the terminal in this operating mode. Please refer to
transfer mode.
operator
Please refer to HMI operator.
optimum version
Version of a terminal that can only be connected to some of the Schneider PLCs.
Main characteristics:
z just enough features
z external 5 VDC power supply (mainly provided by the PLC)
z 1back-light color
P
panel
A terminal can display a panel. Its size can be larger than the terminal display. In this
case, the terminal allows using the scrolling to move the visible part of the panel.
A panel can contain not-animated objects (e.g. background images, static texts) and
animated objects (e.g. value displays, bar graphs).
There are 3 different types of panels:
z application panel
z alarm panel
z system panel
184
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 399 of 416
Glossary
panel editor
The panel editor displays the panel in WYSIWYG format (what you see is what you
get). If the panel can not be displayed completely in the editor, a scroll bar is
displayed.
pilot device
A terminal can communicate with several control system-devices. Of these, only one
is able to send commands to the terminal, and is capable of knowing its status; this
device is called the pilot device. It contains the dialog table.
PLC
programmable logic controller
protocol
language of the communication between a terminal and equipment(s) connected to

an industrial network
R
reference
language
Language in which the designer constructs his application panels. By default, it is

the installation language of the Vijeo-Designer Lite programming software.
S
service keys
Keys on the keypad necessary for certain terminal functions (scrolling, selecting
fields, data input, requesting a menu, etc.).
standard version
Version of a terminal with standard functionality.

z external 24 VDC power supply
z point to point and multi-point connection
z 1 back-light color
static function
keys
Keys placed on the front face of a terminal.

Their behavior is the same for the whole application.
You can set different functions to them (e.g. panel access, command functions).
status bar
Zone located at the bottom of a Windows window. It is used to indicate the state of
the application or active element to the developer.
status table
Part of the dialog table completed by the terminal. This word list represents the
terminal status.
185
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 400 of 416
Glossary
system panel
A system panel is a pre-built, ready to use panel, which is systematically embedded

into an HMI application.
A system panel can be displayed either by the operator or by the equipment of the
automation system, or by the terminal itself.
It informs the operator about system or automation errors by a system popup panel.
It allows the operator to change some terminal parameters (e.g. date,
HMI language) and to navigate from one panel to others.
T
terminal
Please refer to HMI terminal.
third party
Indicates the fact that it is not a Schneider product.

As an example it can be used for:
z third party protocol
z third party PLC
thumbwheel
edition
Rudimentary edition mode based on the same principle as mechanical

thumbwheels: selection of the digit to be modified by means of the horizontal arrow
key(s), then selection of the digit value by means of the vertical arrow key(s).
touch screen
Please refer to matrix touch screen.
transfer mode
A terminals specific mode of operation in which the terminal is able to communicate

with the configuration software to transfer an HMI application.
The HMI designer mainly uses the terminal in this mode of operation. Please refer
to operating mode.
tree structure
Structure representing the application panels and the links between them. By
extension, this window is used to represent the structure of all types of panels.
U
universal version
Version of a terminal that can be connected to Schneider and third party PLCs in
point to point as well as multi-point.
z external 24 VDC power supply
z point to point and multi-point connection
z light indicators
186
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 401 of 416
Glossary
z
z
3 back-light colors
peripheral connection (printer)
upload
Transfer of an HMI application from Vijeo-Designer Lite software to an XBT terminal.
user
Either an operator or a designer (when it is not necessary to make the distinction).
V
variable
Storage element containing a value evolving during the time. Can be either a internal
variable or an external variable.
variable field
Area on a panel configured to display an item depending on the value of a variable

in the connected equipment.
version
There are 3 terminal versions:

z please refer to optimum version
z please refer to standard version
z please refer to universal version
Vijeo-Designer
Lite
Configuration software for the low end Magelis range. It replaces the XBT-L1000
software.
W
WYSIWYG
What You See Is What You Get.
X
XBT
Any HMI terminal (when it is not necessary to make the distinction).
187
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 402 of 416
Glossary
188
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 403 of 416
B
AC
Index
A
alarm
buzzer, 120
alarm list, 119, 120
alarm log, 121, 156
clearing, 156
display, 156
principles, 156
alarm management, 119
alarm panels, 154
acknowledgment, 120
advantages in operating mode, 118
appearance types, 119
display, 121
display priority, 119
displaying, 154
ignoring alarms, 155
log, 121, 156
objective, 118
principle, 118
principles, 118
storage principle, 120
viewing, 154
alarms
objective, 118
appearance types, 119
application, 162
application panels
definition, 113
display, 114
principle, 113
applications, 94
automation system architectures

mulitipoint connection, 177
multidrop connection, 177
point-to-point connection, 176
B
blank labels, 61
button object, 139
C
cable, 106
cabling, 71
cancelling an edition, 150
characteristics, 20, 21
commands
impulse, 136
toggle, 137
confirming an edition, 150
connection
multidrop, 177
multipoint, 177
to a PC, 71
connectors, 38
control elements, 34
controlling automation system, 110
189
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 404 of 416
Index
D
date and time, 128
display format, 128
input, 128
dialog table
exchanging data via, 163
display of a panel, 114
display of an application panel
on power up, 114
dual labelled keys, 98
dynamic function keys, 139
E
edition
cancellation, 150
confirmed, 150
report, 152
environmental influences, 20
exchanging data via the dialog table, 163
F
function keys
dynamic, 39
static, 39
functional command link
representation, 141
functional link, 139
functions
of keys, 98
of touchscreen, 98
XBT terminals, 93
input/modification of a value, 146

insert label XBT N, 48
insert label XBT R, 50
insert label XBT RT, 52
K
key functions, 98
keys, 34, 39
L
label
insert label XBT N, 48
insert label XBT R, 50
insert label XBT RT, 52
language, 127
LED
communication, 106
LED functions, 101
LEDs, 34
line parameters, 130
error counters, 130
log file, 156
managing alarms, 119

material, 20
MiniDIN, 38
mode of operation
selection, 107
modes of operation
operating mode, 106, 122
transfer mode, 106, 109
mounting, 20
HMI language selection, 127

human/machine dialog, 94
I
impulse commands, 136
input
exit on time out, 151
of a value, 148
operating elements, 34
operating mode, 106, 110
operation mode
selection, 107
190
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 405 of 416
Index
P
panels, 34
password-protection, 131
PC
connection to PC, 71
PLC architectures, 175
polling times, 28
printing, 158
alarm log, 160
as a data stream, 159
principles, 158
printing blank labels, 61
process commands
via function keys, 144
via functional links, 139
product reference, 129
protecting the terminal, 131
protocols, 175
time out
input mode, 151
toggle commands, 137
touchscreen functions, 98
transfer mode, 109
transferring software applications, 108
W
word
report, 152
X
XBT NU400
polling times, 28
R
RJ45, 38
S
scrolling within panels, 124
selecting an edition field, 146
by the operator, 146
by the pilot equipment, 147
selecting mode of operation, 107
setting the display parameters, 126
standards, 20
structure of XBT applications, 94
SubD25, 38
system panels, 122, 123
definition, 122
principle, 122
T
temperature, 20
terminal self-test, 174
continuous, 174
on power-up, 174
191
33003962 06/2008
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 406 of 416
H) MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 407 of 416
H1) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

-
NOT APPLICABLE
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 408 of 416
H2) REPAIR AND ADJUSTMENT
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 409 of 416
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
UPS STSTEM
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 410 of 416
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
992-11803.11. 195/201 /A
page: 411 of 416
H3) SPARE PARTS LIST
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 412 of 416
a) Spare Parts to be supplied under the current contract:
(UNAVAILABLE AT THIS TIME)

List is being prepared by Alstom in Paris, and will be included in this chapter after
finalization and approval.
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 413 of 416
H4) SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
- Not applicable
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 414 of 416
H5) LIST OF SUPPLIERS
HYTEC Industrie
28 av des Bthunes
BP19060
95071 CergyPontoise
CEDEX
T: +33 1 34 30 84 37
sav@hytecindustrie.com
SOCOMEC UPS LYONUPS

Le Mas des Entreprises 15-17 rue Emile Zola
69153 DECINES CHARPIEU CEDEX
Tel. +33 (0) 4 78 26 66 56
Fax. +33 (0) 4 72 14 01 52
ups.lyon@socomec.com
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 415 of 416
J) AS BUILT DRAWINGS
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
AHS MRW
92 SEO EQ 100
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM - CONTROL CUBICLE

EQUIPMENT DRAWING
AHS MRW
92 SEO IG
100
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM - GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

DRAWING
AHS MRW
92 SEO IG
101
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM - LEVEL 265.000 - GENERAL

ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
AHS MRW
92 SEO IG
102
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM - SECTION A-A - GENERAL

ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
AHS MRW
92 SEO IG
103
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM -TECHNICAL BUILDING GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
AHS MRW
92 SEO LC
100 SANITARY WASTE TREATMENT SYSTEM - CABLES LIST
AHS MRW
92 SEO LE
100 SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM - EQUIPMENTS LIST
AHS MRW
92 SEO NF
100 SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM -PROCESSING NOTE
AHS MRW
92 SEO RC 100 SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM - CONNECTING DIAGRAM
AHS MRW
92 SEO SD
100 SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
AHS MRW
92 SEO SP
101 SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT - FLOW DIAGRAM
AHS MRW
92 SEO SP
102
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT - SEWAGE STORAGE &

PRIMARY SETTLING DIAGRAM
AHS MRW
92 SEO SP
103
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT - BIOREACTOR & SLUDGE

STABILIZATION DIAGRAM
AHS MRW
92 SEO SP
104
SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT - SECONDARY SETTLING &

FINAL TREATMENT SKID DIAGRAM
REVISION: A
Rev. Date: 18.04.2011
page: 416 of 416

109.06 - Seo - Ups, Contol Cubile, Controller, Technical Leaflets

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

109.06 - Seo - Ups, Contol Cubile, Controller, Technical Leaflets

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COMMENTS :

Returned for correction

GOVERNMENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF THE SUDAN

MEROWE DAM PROJECT

OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SANITARY WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

General Description of Equipment

Brief Description of Equipment Use

Definitions and Technical Terms Used

List of items used

Detailed Description of Equipment

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Repair and Adjustment

Spare Parts Lists

Special Tools Lists

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

SITE TEST REPORTS

SEO DOMESTIC SEWAGE SANITARY

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

C1) BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT

UINTERREUPTED POWER SUPPLY

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

C2) DESCRIPTION OF USE OF EQUIPMENT

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

C3) DEFINITION OF TECHNICAL TERMS

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

C4) List of Items Used

UNIT SYS. NUM

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

CONTROL CUBICLE EQUIPMENT DRAWING

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011

Rev. Date: 18.04.2011